Amt-70 Series

Transcript

AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation AMT-70 Series (with AMT-73 Supplement) (with AMT-75 Supplement) L-Band Satellite Modem 32k - 40 MSymbol BPSK, QPSK, OQPSK, 8PSK, 16QAM, 32APSK Installation and Operations Manual Version 2.14- Dec 4, 2007 1 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation PREFACE Thank you for purchasing the world’s first 16 kbps to >100 MBits L-Band digital satellite modem. This document describes the installation, operation, and maintenance of the AMT-70 series satellite modem. The following information provides the document part number, revision, the copyright notices, along with the pertinent FCC, English, German, and French compliance, and the serviceability of the modem. Document Part Number and Revision: Revision History: V1.0 Date Docum March 19, 2004 ent Revision First release of AMT-70 (Beta) Modifications, replacing back panel, adding Instructions tree. V1.1 July 4, 2004 V1.2 Aug. 31, 004 Added a section of the AMT-70 TPC codes, added text on applications, added a section on demodulator acquisition settings Specified connectors. Added page 7-10 with Figure 42 for back panel connectors and associated table Alarm / Relay; Redundancy Support Added RS485 Terminal Mode Support Added Oct 25, 2004 V1.3 IFRXDOPFIFO – IFTXCLKRECOV Interface commands added. Fixed documentation typo error. V1.4 Nov. 21, 2004 Corrected for Rev. Version levels Changed all reference from baud to symbol - TUNITS/RUNITS - BPS/SPS parameter usage documented (Page 102). - New commands for setting the Ethernet ports P6/P2 from the modem interfaces (Pages 4-12, 5-20) - New RS485 commands - New packet protocol support (page 112) - Configuration store support (Page 4-17, 4-18) - RRMVMK command added (Page 105) V1.5 Dec 10, 2004 - TOUTPUT / S BAND option not supported anymore (Page 104 ) - TLEVEL now supports in 0.1 dBm increment (Page 104) - TCODE / RCODE now supports OM73 parameters options (Page 103) - TRATE / RRATE now supports the parameter UNCODED (Page 103). - TFREF / RFREF commands support (page 7-3) 2.0 Nov 21, 2004 Total Reformat of Manual 2 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation 2.1 Jan 19, 2005 - 2.2 Feb 26, 2005 - Changed RS-485 pin-out to reverse TX+ & TXCreated Appendix A from previous sections of manual regarding Antenna & cable info Added Appendix B, (S+N)/N Conversion Charts Added Mod and Demod Fault Status and pin-outs Changed ifrxclock in Packet Protocol section (Chapter 12) to read “0=internal; 1=demod (was external) Updated Front Panel Display Menus Updated Connector section – added reference to AMT70 and AMT-73L Changed MONITOR RX POWER.AGC to reflect dB Update Packet Protocol Section 7.3 to Version 1.17Y Updated Configuration Option Chart to Version 3 Inserted new drawings to reflect AMT-70 and 73L front and rear panels Added paragraphs in Chapter 4 plus simplified block diagram to reflect Clocking, Loopback functions, and BER testing. Added paragraph on setting Continuous Carrier Mode Added Appendix B to include Eb/No to (S +N)/N Conversion Charts Added ¾ Rate eTPC to AMT-70/73 Technical specs. Changed TREF to TFREF in paragraph 2.8 and added support in paragraph 3.2. Added packet protocol update (Chapter 12). Added AMT-70L/73L Demod Input Level versus Symbol Rate Charts in Appendix A. Upgraded Packet Protocol to V1.19 Removed and incorporated Section 6 with Section 4. Added static DEFAULT Commands Moved Chapter 12 to Chapter 7 – for better flow of the document Changed Chapter 4 Title to MODEM M&C INTERFACES Added Quick Start Guide to Chapter 4 - Reformatted manual. Made correction to several text errors. New Front-Panel interface design Commands IFTDINV , IFRDINV. IFBUFMON added for the data interface. RSPANL new parameter AUTO LOG subsystem enhancements Updated INTERFACE card sections Updated REDUNDANCY chapter RS485CONF, NETCONF new commands Packet Protocol Changes to V1.18 June 30, 2005 - SNMP support added Aug 11, 2005 - AERo Embedded Router support added 2.3 Mar 20, 2005 2.4 June 20, 2005 2.5 2.6 3 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation 2.7 Dec 18, 2005 - 2.8 Feb 22, 2006 - Added RS530/HSSI Redundancy Support - Added AMT75 DVB-S2 support Minor updates to Technical specifications Added Chapter 16 DVB-S2 Theoretical Performance Added Octal E1 card support Real Time Clock Support added. ASI interface VBR support DVBS2S – DVBS2N support New TPILOT commands for DVBS2S – DVBS2N New eTPC code rates ¾, 7/8, 19/20 RPOWER support for AMT73L Buffer Re-center Support for RS530+1*HSSI card. New Summary alarm page New LED function for AMT70 TTPCS / RTPCS commands added Turbo Performance Graphs added 2.9 April 05, 2006 2.10 Nov. 17, 2006 - Added AHPG support 2.11 Dec. 15, 2006 - Added G.703 Interface support 2.12 March 21, 2007 - Added 32APSK support 2.13 June 15, 2007 - Pilots Insertion description added Equalizer description added 2.14 Dec 5, 2007 - Added eTPC and Intelsat values for AMT75 2.1 July 15, 2008 - Corrected eTPC BER vs SNR plots 4 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation Copyright Notices: Copyright ©2004-2005 by AdvantechAMT. All rights reserved. This manual may not be reproduced or disclosed in whole or in part by any means without the written consent of AdvantechAMT, Inc. Customer Support: You can contact AdvantechAMT for customer support at the following office; Head Office AdvantechAMT 657 Orly Avenue Dorval, Quebec H9P 1G1 Tel: 1 (514) 420 0045 Fax: 1 (514) 420 0073 Email : [email protected] The following offices also provide technical support for the modems and other RF products: U.S. Office European Office AdvantechAMT U.S., Inc. 4710 E. Elwood Street Suite 14 Phoenix, AZ, 85040 AdvantechAMT Europe Ltd. 39 Edison Road St. Ives, Huntingdon Cambridgeshire, PE27 3LF Tel: 1 (480) 784-4646 Fax: 1 (480) 784-1010 Tel: 44 (1480) 357 600 Fax: 44 (1480) 357 601 You can also visit our website at http://www.advantechamt.com 5 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation Chapter 1 INTRODUCTION......................................................................................32 1.1 The AMT-7X Family..................................................................................................................32 1.2 Product Overview ....................................................................................................................33 1.2.1 AMT-70/75 Description ........................................................................................................ 33 1.2.2 AMT-73L Description ........................................................................................................... 34 1.3 Ordering the Products Options..............................................................................................35 Chapter 2 INSTALLATION.......................................................................................37 2.1 Introduction..............................................................................................................................37 2.2 Unpacking and Inspection......................................................................................................37 2.2.1 Unpacking ............................................................................................................................ 37 2.2.2 Inventory............................................................................................................................... 37 2.2.3 Site Considerations .............................................................................................................. 37 2.2.4 Installing the unit .................................................................................................................. 37 2.3 Power Requirements...............................................................................................................38 2.3.1 AC Power & Fuse................................................................................................................. 38 2.3.2 DC Power & Fuse................................................................................................................. 38 2.4 Modem Rack/Shelf Support....................................................................................................38 2.5 Data Connections (AMT-70 Series)........................................................................................39 2.5.1 Data Port RS-530 ................................................................................................................. 40 2.5.2 Data Port HSSI..................................................................................................................... 40 2.5.3 Data Port Ethernet................................................................................................................ 40 2.5.4 Monitor and Control RS-232 ................................................................................................ 40 2.5.5 Monitor and Control RS-485 ................................................................................................ 40 2.5.6 Monitor and Control 10/100BaseT Ethernet ........................................................................ 40 2.5.7 Monitor and Control Alarms ................................................................................................. 40 2.5.8 Redundancy ......................................................................................................................... 40 2.6 Data Connections (AMT-73L Series) .....................................................................................40 2.6.1 Data Port EIA/TIA-449/MIL-STD-188-114 ........................................................................... 40 2.6.2 External Clock Reference (MIL-STD-188-115).................................................................... 41 2.7 RF/IF Interfaces........................................................................................................................41 2.7.1 Modulator L-Band Output (AMT-70L) .................................................................................. 41 2.7.2 Modulator L Band Output (AMT-73L)................................................................................... 41 2.7.3 Demodulator L Band Input (AMT-70L and 75)..................................................................... 41 2.7.4 Demodulator L-Band Input (AMT-73L)................................................................................. 42 2.7.5 Demodulator 70/140 MHz IF Input (AMT-70 and AMT-75).................................................. 42 2.8 Bringing the Modulator Online...............................................................................................42 Chapter 3 OPERATIONAL FEATURES...................................................................45 3.1 M&C Interface Descriptions....................................................................................................45 3.2 Acquisition, FEC, Modulation, and Eb/No.............................................................................46 3.2.1 Demodulator Acquisition Tips .............................................................................................. 46 3.2.2 Choice of FEC ...................................................................................................................... 47 3.2.3 Pilots Insertion...................................................................................................................... 49 3.2.4 Equalizer .............................................................................................................................. 49 3.2.5 Link Budget Analysis and Eb/No (Viterbi and Viterbi R/S)................................................... 50 3.3 Modem Applications and Typical Operating Scenarios ......................................................52 3.3.1 DVB (MPEG-2) Modulator.................................................................................................... 53 3.3.2 Data Broadcast Modulator ................................................................................................... 53 3.3.3 SCPC Modem ...................................................................................................................... 53 3.3.4 Bandwidth-On-Demand Modem .......................................................................................... 53 3.3.5 Broadcast Mode ................................................................................................................... 53 6 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation 3.4 Default, Memory Store and Recall Modes .............................................................................54 3.4.1 The default configuration......................................................................................................54 3.4.2 Programmable Memory Configurations ............................................................................... 55 3.5 Clock Options and Buffers – Standard Interface Card ........................................................56 3.5.1 Transmit Timing.................................................................................................................... 58 3.5.1.1 Internal Clock (SCT)..................................................................................................... 58 3.5.1.2 External (Terrestrial) Clock (SCTE) ............................................................................. 58 3.5.1.3 Loop Timing (SCR)....................................................................................................... 58 3.5.1.4 RS530TFD Clock Recovery ......................................................................................... 58 3.5.2 Receive Timing..................................................................................................................... 58 3.5.2.1 Doppler Buffer Auto...................................................................................................... 58 3.5.2.2 Doppler Buffer Enabled – Internal ST Clocking (SCT) ................................................ 59 3.5.2.3 Doppler Buffer Enabled – External TT Clocking (SCTE) ............................................. 59 3.6 Loop-back, Pure Carrier, and BER Test Functions..............................................................59 3.6.1 Data Interface Near End/Far End Loop-back....................................................................... 59 3.6.2 Data System Near End/Far End Loop-back......................................................................... 61 3.6.3 IF Loop-back ........................................................................................................................ 61 3.6.4 Pure Carrier Mode................................................................................................................ 61 3.6.5 Internal BER Test Pattern Generator and Tester................................................................. 61 3.6.6 BER Measurement ............................................................................................................... 62 3.7 ASI Interfaces...........................................................................................................................62 Chapter 4 ACTIVE FRONT PANEL..........................................................................63 4.1 Quick Start Guide ....................................................................................................................63 4.1.1 Bench Test Setup................................................................................................................. 63 4.1.2 Placing Modem Online ......................................................................................................... 65 4.2 The Front Panel........................................................................................................................66 4.2.1 Panel Indicators.................................................................................................................... 66 4.2.2 Keypad & Display ................................................................................................................. 68 4.2.3 Welcome Menu .................................................................................................................... 69 4.2.4 Main Menu............................................................................................................................ 69 4.2.5 Menu Tree Structure ............................................................................................................69 4.2.5.1 TX Menu ....................................................................................................................... 71 4.2.5.1.1 The Transmit Menu ............................................................................................... 71 4.2.5.1.2 Available settings and parameters........................................................................ 72 4.2.5.2 RX Menu ...................................................................................................................... 73 4.2.5.2.1 The available Settings and Parameters ................................................................ 73 4.2.5.3 INTERFACE Menu ....................................................................................................... 75 4.2.5.4 MONITOR Menu .......................................................................................................... 77 4.2.5.5 FUNCTION Menu......................................................................................................... 81 4.2.5.5.1 The INFORMATION submenu .............................................................................. 81 4.2.5.5.2 The CONFIGURATION submenu......................................................................... 81 4.2.5.5.3 The CONTROL submenu...................................................................................... 82 4.2.5.5.4 The CONTROL/PORTS/NETWORK option.......................................................... 82 4.2.5.5.5 The CONTROL/PORTS/RS485 option ................................................................. 83 4.2.5.5.6 The CONTROL/BUC submenu ............................................................................. 84 4.2.5.5.7 The CONTROL/LNB submenu ............................................................................. 84 4.2.5.5.8 The CONTROL/LCD submenu ............................................................................. 84 4.2.5.5.9 The TESTS submenu............................................................................................ 85 4.2.5.5.10 The REBOOT option ........................................................................................... 85 4.2.6 Executing Variable Commands from the Front Panel.......................................................... 85 Chapter 5 5.1 5.2 5.3 MANAGING THE MODEM ......................................................................87 Using the RS-232 Port .............................................................................................................87 Using RS-485 Rear Panel Remote M&C ................................................................................87 Using the Ethernet Port ..........................................................................................................88 7 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation 5.4 Starting the Modem .................................................................................................................88 5.5 Login to the modem ................................................................................................................89 5.6 Setting the Security .................................................................................................................90 5.7 Setting the modem date and time ..........................................................................................90 5.8 Using the Modem Shell ...........................................................................................................91 5.8.1 Command Format ................................................................................................................ 91 5.8.1.1 Command Help ............................................................................................................ 91 5.8.2 Commands Recall and Editing............................................................................................. 91 5.8.2.1 Commands Completion Mode...................................................................................... 92 5.8.2.2 Command Completion Mode ....................................................................................... 92 5.8.3 Scheduling Periodic Commands .......................................................................................... 93 5.9 Configuring the RS-485 Port ..................................................................................................93 5.10 Accessing the Modem through a Network ...........................................................................94 5.10.1 Configuring the network address ......................................................................................... 94 5.10.2 Configuring the routing tables .............................................................................................. 94 5.10.3 Using Telnet for Remote Control.......................................................................................... 95 5.11 Using FTP for Software Download ........................................................................................96 5.11.1 Downloading from the RS-232 Serial Port ........................................................................... 97 5.12 Using SNMP .............................................................................................................................98 5.12.1 Introduction........................................................................................................................... 98 5.12.2 How to configure SNMP....................................................................................................... 98 5.12.3 The SNMP MIB source file................................................................................................... 99 5.13 Modem events and logging ....................................................................................................99 5.13.1 The SNMP traps.................................................................................................................100 5.13.2 Using the log file.................................................................................................................100 Chapter 6 THE MODEM COMMAND SET ...............................................................102 6.1 Introduction............................................................................................................................102 6.1.1 The Command Syntax .......................................................................................................102 6.1.2 The Modulator/Demodulator Standard Commands ...........................................................102 6.1.3 The Modulator Specific Commands...................................................................................104 6.1.4 The Demodulator Specific Commands ..............................................................................105 6.1.5 Getting the Chassis Configuration and Status ...................................................................106 6.1.6 The Monitor and Control Commands.................................................................................106 6.1.7 The Interface Commands...................................................................................................108 6.1.7.1 ASI Interface Commands ...........................................................................................108 6.1.7.2 RS530 + 1*HSSI interface..........................................................................................108 6.1.7.3 3*HSSI Interface.........................................................................................................109 6.1.7.4 High-performance Gateway (AHPG) .........................................................................110 Chapter 7 7.1 7.2 7.3 The RS-485 Control Commands...........................................................................................111 The Command Mode .............................................................................................................111 The Packet Protocol ..............................................................................................................112 Chapter 8 8.1 8.2 8.3 8.4 8.5 8.6 8.7 8.8 8.9 USING THE RS-485 PORT......................................................................111 CABLES AND PIN-OUTS........................................................................113 Rear Panel Connector Arrangements .................................................................................113 RS-442/449 to RS-530 Adapter Cable ..................................................................................114 RS-422/449 to RS-530 Y-Cable .............................................................................................115 RS-530 Data Interface Pin-Outs (AMT-70) ...........................................................................116 HSSI Connector Pin-Outs .....................................................................................................117 RJ-45 Ethernet M&C Connector Pin-Outs...........................................................................117 RJ-45 Ethernet IP Router Connector Pin-Outs (AMT-73L) ................................................118 RS-232 Connector Pin-Outs .................................................................................................118 RS-232 Null Modem Cable Assembly ..................................................................................118 8 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation 8.10 8.11 8.12 8.13 8.14 8.15 8.16 8.17 8.18 8.19 RS-485 Connector Pin-Outs .................................................................................................119 EIA/TIA-449 AMT-73L Connector Pin-Outs .........................................................................119 RJ-45 RS232 Pin-Out (AMT-73L) ..........................................................................................120 Front panel RJ-11 RS232 Pin-Out (AMT-70/75)...................................................................120 Front panel RJ-11 to PC 9-pin RS-232 Adapter cable........................................................121 SSPB/Modem Cabling Requirements ..................................................................................121 Alarms Connector Description.............................................................................................122 L-Band Transmit Cable .........................................................................................................122 L-Band Receive Cable ...........................................................................................................122 DB15 – DB15 – Switch Cable................................................................................................123 Chapter 9 TURBO CODING DETAILS.....................................................................124 9.1 Turbo Product Code Overview.............................................................................................124 9.2 AMT7X family TPC Overview ................................................................................................125 9.2.1 CRCs and Scrambling........................................................................................................125 9.2.2 Framing ..............................................................................................................................126 9.2.3 Calculating the Code Rate .................................................................................................126 9.3 3rd Party TPC Familes............................................................................................................128 Chapter 10 10.1 10.2 10.3 10.4 10.5 BUC AND ADVANTECH SSPB ..............................................................129 SSPB (BUC) Interface Connections.....................................................................................129 LNB Interface Connections ..................................................................................................129 RS-232 M&C Interface Connections ....................................................................................129 AMT-70 Modem Configuration .............................................................................................129 TX Carrier Enable...................................................................................................................130 Chapter 11 REDUNDANCY........................................................................................131 11.1 Hardware Installation ............................................................................................................131 11.1.1 ASI Interface.......................................................................................................................131 11.1.2 RS-530 / HSSI interface.....................................................................................................133 11.1.2.1 Front panel push buttons .......................................................................................136 11.1.2.2 LED indicators ........................................................................................................136 11.2 Software Configuration.........................................................................................................137 11.3 Messages................................................................................................................................140 Chapter 12 APPENDIX A SYSTEM CONSIDERATIONS ..........................................141 A.1 Typical AMT-70L/AMT-73L Interconnections.....................................................................141 A.1.1 Setting the transmit levels ..................................................................................................141 A.2 LNB, BUC & Antenna Installation ........................................................................................143 A.2.1 Choosing the LNB & BUC ..................................................................................................143 A.2.2 LNB Physical Installation....................................................................................................143 A.2.3 Antenna Alignment .............................................................................................................143 A.2.4 Satellite Position.................................................................................................................143 A.2.5 Antenna Pointing Angles....................................................................................................144 A.2.6 Pointing the Antenna ..........................................................................................................145 A.2.7 Input Level Range Versus Symbol Rate ............................................................................146 Chapter 13 APPENDIX B S/N TO Eb/No CONVERSION ..........................................148 Chapter 14 APPENDIX C EMBEDDED ROUTER......................................................152 Chapter 15 APPENDIX D HIGH-PERFORMANCE GATEWAY ..............................155 15.1 Getting Started.......................................................................................................................157 15.1.1 Modem M&C configuration.................................................................................................157 9 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation 15.1.2 Router module configuration ..............................................................................................158 Chapter 16 APPENDIX E GATEWAY 161 G.703 TELECOMMUNICATIONS 16.1 Rear Panel Connector Arrangements .................................................................................161 16.1.1 RS-232 Console Connector (J3)........................................................................................162 16.1.2 Overhead D-Sub 15 pin Connector (J14) ..........................................................................162 16.1.3 RJ-45 Ethernet Console Connector Pin Out (J5)...............................................................163 16.1.4 Balanced E1/T1 Connector Ports 1-4 (J16/1/2/3/4)...........................................................163 16.1.5 Balanced E1/T1 Connector Ports 5-8 (J17/1/2/3/4)...........................................................165 16.1.6 FXS Dual RJ-11 Telephone Interface (J13).......................................................................166 16.2 Command Set.........................................................................................................................167 16.2.1 Help ....................................................................................................................................167 16.2.2 Recall and Editing ..............................................................................................................168 16.2.3 Command Syntax...............................................................................................................168 16.2.4 Commands for the Telecommunications Gateway ............................................................169 16.2.5 Commands to set up individual E1 channels .....................................................................170 16.2.6 Mux Controller set-up commands ......................................................................................171 16.2.7 Mux Controller set-up commands – Transmit side ............................................................172 16.2.8 Mux Controller set-up commands – Receive side .............................................................173 16.3 Configuration examples of AMT-70 modem equipped with PDH multiplexer.................174 16.3.1.1 To change a current Insert or Drop range..............................................................174 16.3.1.2 To store the current configuration ..........................................................................174 16.3.2 Example 1 ..........................................................................................................................174 16.3.3 Example 2 ..........................................................................................................................176 16.3.4 Example 3 ..........................................................................................................................178 16.3.5 Example 4 ..........................................................................................................................179 16.3.6 Example 5 ..........................................................................................................................180 16.3.7 Example 6 ..........................................................................................................................180 16.3.8 Example 7 ..........................................................................................................................181 Chapter 17 APPENDIX F TURBO PRODUCT CODE PERFORMANCE ................182 Chapter 18 APPENDIX G DVB-S2 Theoretical Performance .................................195 10 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation LIST OF FIGURES FIGURE 1: THE AMT-7X FAMILY .............................................................................................................. 33 FIGURE 2: AMT-70 FAMILY: PRODUCTS CONFIGURATION OPTIONS .......................................................... 36 FIGURE 3: RACK MOUNT SUPPORT KIT..................................................................................................... 39 FIGURE 4: BUC CONTROL COMMANDS .................................................................................................... 41 FIGURE 5: FEC / MODE / RATE CONFIGURATION CHART ....................................................................... 49 FIGURE 6: ALLOCATED BANDWIDTH AND EB/NO FOR VITERBI AND VITERBI + REED SOLOMON ................... 52 FIGURE 7: FUNCTIONAL BLOCK DIAGRAM OF AMT-70/73L MODEM .......................................................... 56 FIGURE 8: AMT-70L OR AMT-73L LOOPBACK CABLE ASSEMBLY ........................................................... 63 FIGURE 9: PARAMETER CHANGES IN TEST MODE ..................................................................................... 64 FIGURE 10: MODEM COMMANDS QUICK START GUIDE .............................................................................. 65 FIGURE 11: THE AMT-70 FRONT PANEL.................................................................................................. 67 FIGURE 12: THE AMT-73L ACTIVE FRONT PANEL ................................................................................... 67 FIGURE 13: THE AMT-73L FRONT PANEL LEDS..................................................................................... 68 FIGURE 14: KEYPAD BUTTONS AND THEIR USAGE. ................................................................................... 69 FIGURE 15: FRONT PANEL DISPLAY TX (TRANSMIT) MENU ....................................................................... 72 FIGURE 16: FRONT PANEL DISPLAY RX (TRANSMIT) MENU....................................................................... 74 FIGURE 17: FRONT PANEL DISPLAY INTERFACE MENU. ........................................................................ 76 FIGURE 18: FRONT PANEL DISPLAY MONITOR MENU ............................................................................. 77 FIGURE 19: FRONT PANEL DISPLAY FUNC (FUNCTION) MENU. ................................................................ 82 FIGURE 20: ACCEPTABLE PARAMETERS FOR FEC TYPE........................................................................... 86 FIGURE 21: BOOTING THE MODEM............................................................................................................ 89 FIGURE 22: LOGIN TO THE MODEM IN COMMAND LINE MODE (CLI)............................................................ 89 FIGURE 23: CHANGING THE SECURITY CODE (PASSWORD) ....................................................................... 90 FIGURE 24: LISTING THE MODEM COMMAND SET ....................................................................................... 91 FIGURE 25: MODEM SHELL FUNCTION KEYS .............................................................................................. 91 FIGURE 26: USING THE COMMAND COMPLETION MODE .............................................................................. 92 FIGURE 27: USING THE COMMAND COMPLETION MODE (PART #2) .............................................................. 92 FIGURE 28: SCHEDULING MONOTONIC COMMANDS .................................................................................... 93 FIGURE 29: CLI COMMAND SET FOR RS-485. ......................................................................................... 93 FIGURE 30: CONFIGURING THE TX NETWORK ADDRESS ............................................................................ 94 FIGURE 31: CONFIGURING THE RX NETWORK ADDRESS ........................................................................... 94 FIGURE 32: CONFIGURING THE STATIC ROUTING TABLES ........................................................................... 95 FIGURE 33: LOGIN USING TELNET ............................................................................................................ 95 FIGURE 34: DOWNLOADING SOFTWARE USING FTP.................................................................................. 96 FIGURE 35: THE MODEM LOG EVENTS....................................................................................................... 99 FIGURE 36: THE REDUNDANCY SYSTEM LOG EVENTS ..............................................................................100 FIGURE 37: AMT70 COMMAND SYNTAX .................................................................................................102 FIGURE 38: AMT-70 STANDARD (L-BAND OR 70 MHZ) CONFIGURATIONS ..............................................102 FIGURE 39: MONITOR SPECIFICS COMMANDS .........................................................................................104 FIGURE 40: DEMODULATOR SPECIFIC COMMANDS..................................................................................105 FIGURE 41: MONITOR COMMANDS SUMMARY .........................................................................................106 FIGURE 42: RS530 + 1*HSSI COMMANDS SUMMARY ............................................................................108 FIGURE 43: 3*HSSI COMMANDS SUMMARY............................................................................................109 FIGURE 44: AHPG ROUTER COMMANDS SUMMARY ...............................................................................110 FIGURE 45: BACK PANEL CONNECTORS FOR AMT-70............................................................................113 FIGURE 46: BACK PANEL CONNECTORS FOR AMT-73L .........................................................................113 FIGURE 47: TS-422/RS-449 TO RS-530 ADAPTER CABLE PIN-OUT ......................................................114 FIGURE 48: RS-422/RS-449 TO RS-530 Y-CABLE PIN-OUTS ...............................................................115 FIGURE 49: RS-530 DATA INTERFACE PIN-OUTS ...................................................................................116 FIGURE 50: HSSI DATA INTERFACE PIN-OUTS .......................................................................................117 FIGURE 51: ETHERNET RJ-45 CONNECTOR PIN-OUTS ...........................................................................117 FIGURE 52: RS-232 CONNECTOR PIN-OUTS ..........................................................................................118 11 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation FIGURE 53: RS-232 NULL MODEM CONNECTOR PIN-OUTS ....................................................................118 FIGURE 54: RS-485 CONNECTORS PIN-OUTS ........................................................................................119 FIGURE 55: EIA/TIA-449 CONNECTOR PIN-OUTS ..................................................................................119 FIGURE 56: CABLE PIN-OUTS BETWEEN AMT-70 AND ADVANTECHAMT C & KU BAND ...........................121 FIGURE 57: PIN-OUTS FOR ALARM CONNECTOR .....................................................................................122 FIGURE 58: DB15-DB15-REDUNDANCY SWITCH ADAPTER CABLE PIN-OUTS .........................................123 FIGURE 59: ETPC CODE RATES AND EB/NO VALUES FOR AMT70 & 73.................................................127 FIGURE 60 : ETPC CODE RATES AND EB/NO VALUES FOR AMT75 .........................................................127 FIGURE 61 3RD PARTY ETPC CODE RATES AND EB/NO FOR AMT70.........................................................128 FIGURE 62 3RD PARTY ETPC CODE RATES AND EB/NO FOR AMT75.........................................................128 FIGURE 63: TEST DIAGRAM FOR SSPB AND LNB ..................................................................................130 FIGURE 64: REDUNDANCY CONNECTIONS: ASI INTERFACE AS DATA INPUT .............................................132 FIGURE 65: RS-530 / HSSI REDUNDANCY SYSTEM CONNECTION OVERVIEW ..........................................134 FIGURE 66: 1:1 REDUNDANCY SHELF CONNECTIONS REAR-VIEW. RS-530 AND BNC CONNECTIONS SHOWN .....................................................................................................................................................135 FIGURE 67: 1:1 REDUNDANCY SHELF CONNECTIONS REAR-VIEW. HSSI AND BNC CONNECTIONS SHOWN135 FIGURE 68: 1-1 REDUNDANCY CONTROLLER (R5-530/HSSI ONLY) FRONT PANEL ..................................136 FIGURE 69: AMT-70/73 REDUNDANCY COMMANDS ...............................................................................137 FIGURE 70: REDUNDANCY FAULT MASK REGISTER ................................................................................138 FIGURE 71: TYPICAL AMT-70 CABLING INSTALLATION............................................................................141 FIGURE 72: INSTALLATION USING 70 MHZ INPUTS ..................................................................................141 FIGURE 73: POWER LOSS IN LMR-600 CABLE VERSUS CABLE LENGTH .................................................142 FIGURE 74: QSSK (S+N) CONVERSION CHART .....................................................................................149 FIGURE 75: 8PSK (S+N) CONVERSION CHART ......................................................................................150 FIGURE 76: 16QAM (S+N)/N CONVERSION CHART ...............................................................................151 FIGURE 77: EMBEDDED ROUTER SUPPORT ............................................................................................152 FIGURE 78: AMT-70/73L REAR PANEL EQUIPPED WITH AERO OPTION ..................................................152 FIGURE 79. AHPG SUPPORT ................................................................................................................155 FIGURE 80: SIMPLE POINT-TO-POINT CONFIGURATION OF TWO AMT-75 MODEMS....................................158 FIGURE 81: REAR PANEL .......................................................................................................................161 FIGURE 82: QPSK AT 96KBPS AT –100DBM / HZ ..................................................................................182 FIGURE 83: QPSK AT 256KBPS AT –104DBM/HZ INPUT POWER ............................................................183 FIGURE 84: QPSK 3MBPS AT –104DBM/HZ INPUT POWER ...................................................................184 FIGURE 85: QPSK AT 10MBPS AT –104DBM/HZ INPUT POWER .............................................................185 FIGURE 86: QPSK AT 35MBPS AT –104DBM/HZ INPUT POWER .............................................................186 FIGURE 87: 8PSK AT 150KBPS AT –104DBM/HZ INPUT POWER .............................................................187 FIGURE 88: 8PSK AT 400KBPS AT –104DBM/HZ INPUT POWER .............................................................188 FIGURE 89: 8PSK AT 16MBPS AT –104DBM/HZ INPUT POWER ..............................................................189 FIGURE 90: 8PSK AT 55MBPS AT –104DBM/HZ INPUT POWER ..............................................................190 FIGURE 91: 16QAM AT 512KBPS AT –104DBM/HZ INPUT POWER ..........................................................191 FIGURE 92: 16QAM AT 6MBPS AT –104DBM/HZ INPUT POWER .............................................................192 FIGURE 93: 16QAM AT 20MBPS AT –104DBM/HZ INPUT POWER ...........................................................193 FIGURE 94: 16QAM AT 70MBPS AT –104DBM/HZ INPUT POWER ...........................................................194 FIGURE 95: DVB-S2 THEORETICAL PERFORMANCE FIGURES ..................................................................195 12 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation TABLE OF DEFINITIONS 16QAM ............................................................................................16 Quadrature Amplitude Modulation 8PSK .........................................................................................................................8 Phase-shift Keying AHPG ..........................................................................................Advantech High-Performance Gateway ASI............................................................................................................. Asynchronous Serial Interface BPSK................................................................................................................ Binary Phase-shift Keying BDC....................................................................................................................... Block Down-Converter BER ......................................................................................................................................Bit Error Rate BUC............................................................................................................................ Block Up-Converter C-Band ............................................................................ITU-defined frequency band (5.250-5.925GHz) CRC................................................................................................................. Cyclic Redundancy Check DCE......................................................................................................Data Communications Equipment DTE ...................................................................................................................Data Terminal Equipment DVB ................................................................................................................. Digital Video Broadcasting eTPC ..................................................................................................... Enhanced Turbo Product Coding ETSI ..........................................................................European Telecommunications Standards Institute FCC .............................................................................................. Federal Communications Commission FEC ....................................................................................................................Forward Error Correction FTP.......................................................................................................................... File Transfer Protocol HSSI .............................................................................................................. High-Speed Serial Interface IEEE ............................................................................... Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers IBS.................................................................................................Intelsat Business Services (IESS-309) IDR .................................................................................................... Intermediate Data Rate (IESS-308) IESS ......................................................................................................... Intelsat Earth Station Standard IETF........................................................................................................ Internet Engineering Task Force IF ..........................................................................................................................Intermediate Frequency Ku-Band ............................................. ITU-defined frequency band (13.40-14.00GHz, 15.70-17.70GHz) L-Band.......................... ITU-defined frequency band (1.215-1.400GHz, extended to 0.9500-2.150GHz) LCD ......................................................................................................................... Liquid Crystal Display LED ........................................................................................................................... Light Emitting Diode LNA ............................................................................................................................Low-Noise Amplifier LNB ................................................................................................... Low-Noise Block (Down) Converter M&C ......................................................................................................................Management & Control MIB ........................................................................................................... Management Information Base MPEG........................................................................................................... Motion Picture Expert Group QPSK ....................................................................................................... Quadrature Phase-shift Keying OQPSK...........................................................................................Offset Quadrature Phase-shift Keying PLO .................................................................................................................... Phase-Locked Oscillator PTCM ............................................................................................... Pragmatic Trellis Coded Modulation RF................................................................................................................................... Radio Frequency RFC ..................................................................................... Request For Comment (an IETF “standard”) RS ......................................................................................................................................Reed-Solomon RSV ........................................................................................................................ Reed-Solomon-Viterbi RU ................................................................................................................... Rack Unit (19”W x 1.75”H) RX .................................................................................................................................................Receive SNMP ........................................................................................... Simple Network Management Protocol SCPC ............................................................................................................. Single Carrier Per Channel SSPB....................................................................................................... Solid-State Block Up-Converter TCP/IP............................................................................Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol TPC ........................................................................................................................ Turbo Product Coding TX.................................................................................................................................................Transmit 13 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation SAFETY NOTICE FCC Warning This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy, and, if not installed in accordance with the instructions contained herein, may cause interference to radio communications. It has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A computing device pursuant to Subpart J of Part 15 of the Federal Communications Commission rules, which are designed to provide reasonable protection against such interference, when operating in a commercial environment. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause interference. In this case, the user is required to take whatever measures are necessary to correct the interference at the user’s expense. If radio frequency interference is encountered after the installation of this equipment, corrective measures are required to reduce the interference. Information on recommended measures can be obtained from the manufacturer. English/German/French Warnings: English Text (UL/CSA) WARNING WARNUNG German Text (VDE/TUV) French Text AVERTISSEMENT Only qualified technicians should have access to this unit. Der Zugang ins Innere des Gerätes ist nur einem fachlich qualifizierten Techniker gestattet. Seulement des spécialistes qualifiés devrait avoir accès à cet appareil. 1. To ensure adequate cooling of the equipment, a 2.0-inch unobstructed space must be provided around all sides of the unit. 1. Um die Kühlung des Gerätes nicht zu beeinträchtigen, ist es notwendig, an allen Seiten des Gerätes ca. 5 cm Raum zu lassen. 1. Afin de ne pas nuire au processus de refroidissement, il est nécessaire de laisser un espace d’environ 5 cm de chaque côté de l’appareil. 2. The AC Power Socket shall be installed near the equipment and shall be easily accessible. 2. Stellen Sie das Gerät in der Nähe eines geerdeten Schutzkontaktsteckers so auf, dass der Stecker leicht erreichbar und zugänglich ist. 2. Placez l’appareil près d’une prise de courant facilement accessible. 3. Remove power plug from the power socket before performing any service work on the unit! 3. Vorm Öffnen des Gerätes muss der Netzstecker vom Stromnetz getrennt werden! 3. Débranchez l’appareil avant de l’ouvrir. Caution Only factory authorized service personnel should perform Service on this unit. Failure to observe this warning can result in malfunction to the unit as well as electrocution to personnel. Avertissement Cet appareil ne peut être examiné ou réparé que par un employé autorisé du fabricant. Si cette consigne n’est pas respectée, il y a risque de panne et/ou d’électrocution. Vorsich Dieses Gerät darf nur durch das bevollmächtigte Kundendienstpersonal der Fabrik instandgehalten werden. Die Nichtbeachtung dieser Vorschrift kann zu Fehlfunktionen des Gerätes führen und das Personal durch Stromschläge gefährden. 14 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation WARRANTY AND SERVICE AdvantechAMT warrants to the Purchaser that the Products and any Repaired Products (Repairs) will be free from defects in material and workmanship for a period of two years from the date of shipment to the Purchaser. AdvantechAMT‘s obligation under this warranty is limited to replacing or repairing, at AdvantechAMT's option, Products or Repairs found by AdvantechAMT to be defective within the warranty period. All such replacements and repairs shall be performed at facilities designated by AdvantechAMT and shall be performed only after the customer has received a Return Material Authorization (RMA) number from AdvantechAMT and has returned the Product to AdvantechAMT, shipping and insurance prepaid by Purchaser. The returned Product must be accompanied by the customer's name, address and telephone number, the model and serial number of the Product, a statement of the purchase date and a detailed description of the problem. Products and Repairs returned by Purchaser shall be repaired by AdvantechAMT using new or refurbished parts and shall be returned to Purchaser by AdvantechAMT, shipping prepaid by AdvantechAMT. This warranty shall immediately become null and void if, in AdvantechAMT's sole judgment, the Product has been subject to unauthorized modification, misuse, abuse, neglect, accident, improper installation or application, alteration or neglect in use, storage, transportation or handling, or if the serial number and/or other Product markings have been removed, defaced or altered. AdvantechAMT may, at its discretion, perform out-of-warranty repairs at AdvantechAMT facilities in exchange of customary charges, or offer a written agreement extending the terms of this warranty at a price stated in such agreement. All repairs performed out of warranty or pursuant to an extended warranty agreement shall be subject to all of the applicable limitations and procedures of this Agreement. The above warranties are in lieu of all other warranties, expressed, implied, or statutory or arising by custom of trade usage, including any warranty of merchantability of fitness for any unique, special or express purpose, and of all other obligations of liabilities whether in contract, tort or otherwise including, without limitation, liability for damages (whether general or special, direct or indirect, consequential, incidental, exemplary) or any claim for the loss of profits or business or for damage to goodwill. 15 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation EXTENDED WARRANTY OPTIONS Please contact Customer Service or your reseller for information on optional extended warranties. SERVICE Support functions provided by AdvantechAMT's Customer Service include complete factory repair for both in-warranty and out-of-warranty equipment. In the U.S.A., call AdvantechAMT at 1-(480)-784-4646 for Customer Support. In Canada, you can call at 1-(514)-420-0045 and in Europe, contact at 44-(1480)-357-600. In all other countries, contact your local AdvantechAMT distributor or reseller. A Customer Service engineer will answer warranty-related questions, discuss your specific equipment problems, and when necessary, give you shipping instructions for returning equipment to AdvantechAMT for repair. To return a Product for service or repair, you must obtain a RMA number from AdvantechAMT's Customer Service. The following information is required: Customer name, address, telephone number Model number Serial number Detailed description of problem All customer-returned units must be shipped to AdvantechAMT freight prepaid, in the original carton or equivalent. AdvantechAMT is not responsible for damage in transit. All repairs will require return of the entire equipment to AdvantechAMT. No individual modules will be accepted for repair under this contract. 16 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (AMT-70) DESCRIPTION MODULATOR SPECIFICATION Data Rate Data Rate Options Symbol Rate Data Interfaces 16 Kbps to 140 Mbps 16kbps to 10Mbps, 20Mbps, 52Mbps and 140Mbps 32 KSymbol to 40 MSymbol RS 530 / V35 (standard) ASI (optional) Single HSSI interface(standard) Triple HSSI (optional) Ethernet 10/100BaseT (optional) Dual Ethernet 10/100BaseT + Single HSSI (optional) G.703 (optional) 1 to 8 X E1/T1 (optional) 9 pin D-sub (F) for RS-232 Serial interface 9 pin /d-sub (F) for RS-485 Serial interface (Terminal mode and packet protocol mode) 15 pin D-sub (F) for Alarm interface (switch-over contact) RJ-45 10/100BaseT Ethernet 25 pin, D-sub (F), standard for RS530 Data interface BNC (F) - 75 Ω for ASI and E3/T3 G.703 interfaces 50 pin SCSI-2 connector (F) for HSSI Data RJ-45 for Ethernet options and for balanced bi-directional E1/T1 interface with Octal E1/T1 card Modulator will be defined as Data Communications Equipment (DCE) Continuous Wave (CW) Local / Remote Monitor & Control Interfaces Data Connector Data Clock Source Modulation Type & FEC Rate Note: Refer to 9.2.3 for Turbo Code Rates. BPSK: Intelsat 1/2,3/4,7/8 Viterbi DVB 1/2, 2/3, 3/4, 5/6, 7/8 Viterbi with RS (204,188) Outer Code, Optional eTPC Rate 2/5 ,3/5, 3/4, 4/5,7/8, 8/9, 19/20, Optional QPSK / OQPSK: Intelsat 1/2, 3/4, 7/8 Selectable Intelsat (219,201) or RS (126,112) Outer Code DVB 1/2, 2/3, 3/4, 5/6, 7/8 with RS (204,188), Optional eTPC Rate 2/5, 3/5, 3/4, 4/5, 7/8, 8/9, 19/20, Optional 8PSK: Intelsat IESS-310 2/3 PTCM Inner code Selectable Intelsat (219,201) or RS (126,112) Outer Code DVB-DSNG PTCM Rate 2/3, 5/6, 8/9 with RS(204,188), Optional eTPC Rate 3/5,3/4, 4/5, 7/8, 8/9, 19/20, Optional Modulation Roll-Off Factor 16QAM: DVB-DSNG PTCM Rate 3/4, 7/8 with RS(204,188) code eTPC Rate 3/4, 4/5, 7/8, 8/9, 19/20, Optional 12% to 35% with 1% resolution 17 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation DESCRIPTION Configurable Forward Error Correction SPECIFICATION Rate 1/2, 2/3, 3/4, 5/6 and 7/8 convolutional encoding K=7. Optional: Reed Solomon outer (based on DVB-S/ DVB-DSNG standards) with convolutional inner coding or Enhanced Turbo code rate range: between 0.448 and 0.914 (see 9.1 for details). Intelsat FEC rates from 16kbps to 60 Mbps (8PSK) DVB compliant rates from 64kbps to 110 Mbps RF Output Connector RF Output Frequency RF Output Power Equipment Reference Frequency & Phase Noise BUC Supply Turbo data rates from 64kbps to 140 Mbps N-type, (F) for L-Band Optional: CPR137 contact Impedance: 50 Ω Return Loss: ≥10 dB L-Band: 950 to 1750 MHz, option to 2000MHz, variable in 100 Hz steps Optional C-Band: 5.850 to 6.425 GHz, variable in 100 Hz steps Range: 0 to -25 dBm, adjustable in 0.10 dB increments Accuracy: ± 0.5 dB Temp Stability: ± 0.25 dB Reference Frequency: 10 MHz External Ref Level: 0 dBm ± 2 dB Internal Freq Stability: Stratum-1 (0.15 ppm due to all sources) 24V or 48V DC (Optional) DEMODULATOR Data Rate Data Rate Options Symbol Rate Data Scrambling Polynomial Demodulator Type & FEC Rate Note: Refer to 9.2.3 for Turbo Code Rates. 16 Kbps to 140 Mbps, variable 16kbps to 10Mbps, 20Mbps, 52Mbps and 140Mbps 32 KSymbol to 40 MSymbol Intelsat V.35 or Intelsat Synchronous or DVB Compliant BPSK: Intelsat 1/2,3/4,7/8 DVB 1/2, 2/3, 3/4, 5/6, 7/8 with RS (204,188) Outer Code eTPC Rate 2/5 ,3/5, 3/4, 4/5, 7/8, 8/9, 19/20 QPSK / OQPSK: Intelsat 1/2, 3/4, 7/8 Selectable Intelsat (219,201) or RS (126,112) Outer Code, Optional DVB 1/2, 2/3, 3/4, 5/6, 7/8 with RS (204,188), Optional eTPC Rate 2/5, 3/5, 3/4, 4/5, 7/8, 8/9, 19/20, Optional 8PSK: Intelsat IESS310 2/3 PTCM Inner code Selectable Intelsat (219,201) or RS (126,112) Outer Code, Optional DVB-DSNG PTCM Rate 2/3, 5/6, 8/9 with RS(204,188), Optional eTPC Rate 3/5, 3/4, 4/5, 7/8, 8/9, 19/20, Optional 16QAM: DVB-DSNG PTCM Rate 3/4, 7/8 with RS(204,188) code, Optional eTPC Rate 3/4, 4/5, 7/8, 8/9, 19/20, Optional IF Input (Option) 2 x BNC, (F) for 70 MHz / 140 MHz Impedance: 50 Ω Return Loss: ≥10 dB RF Input (See A.2.7 for Input Power versus Symbol Rate) 2 x F-type, (F) for 950MHz to 2150MHz Impedance: 75 Ω Return Loss: ≥9 dB Input Level: 10Log (Symbol Rate) -100 dBm, +12 dB Maximum Composite Input Power: -20dBm 18 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation DESCRIPTION SPECIFICATION Typical L-Band Phase Noise (at 2GHz) -60 dBc/Hz at 10 Hz -70 dBc/Hz at 100 Hz -80 dBc/Hz at 1 kHz -90 dBc/Hz at 10 kHz -98 dBc/Hz at 100 kHz Refer to Figure 6 for Viterbi and Viterbi with Reed Solomon FEC. Refer to Chapter 9 for eTPC FEC. 13V or 18V switchable 450 mA maximum 22 kHz switching tone available 10 MHz reference output (nominal 0.5V p-p) BER Performance and Channel Spacing LNB Supply Voltage LNB Signals DATA & MANAGEMENT INTERFACES Monitoring & Control (M&C) Data Interfaces Receiver ASI Interface Front Panel: as standard External M&C Interface: 10/100Base-T, RS-232, RS-485, SNMP (future option) Configuration Parameter Storage: NVRAM RS 530 / V35 (standard) ASI (optional) Single HSSI interface (standard) Triple HSSI interface (optional) Ethernet 10/100 Base-T (optional) Dual Ethernet 10/100 Base-T + Single HSSI (optional) G.703 (optional) Nx T1/E1(optional) Encoded Line Rate: 270 MSymbol ± 100 ppm Min Sensitivity (D21.5 idle pattern): 200 mV Max Input Voltage: 880 mV p-p Discrete Connector Return Loss: ≥15 dB Max. Distance: 150 m PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS Physical Dimensions Power AC (DC Optional) Environmental The AMT-70 is a rack-mountable 1RU EIA chassis. Height: 4.4 cm (1.75") Width: 43.2 cm (17") without ears and 48.26cm (19”) with ears Depth: 40.6 cm (16") Weight: 11 lb (5 kg) maximum AC: Auto sensing 95-265 VAC, 50/60 Hz DC: 48 VDC (+32 to +72 VDC) Typical Power Dissipation: 45 W without LNB/BUC power supply 60 W when powering LNB/BDC 150 W when powering BUC and LNB/BDC Operating Temperature: 0°C to 45°C (32°F to 122°F) o o o o Storage Temperature: -25 C to 85 C (-13 F to 185 F) Relative Humidity: up to 90% non-condensing, operating; up to 95% noncondensing, storage Altitude: Up to 10,000 ft (3,045 m) operating; to 40,000 ft (12,180 m) during transit 19 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (AMT-73L) DESCRIPTION MODULATOR SPECIFICATION Data Rate (mandatory) BPSK QPSK/OQPSK 8PSK/TCM 8PSK/16QAM Up to 110Mbps in optional 16QAM Turbo mode 16kbps to 10Mbps, 20Mbps, 52Mbps and 140Mbps 32 KSymbol to 40 MSymbol EIA/TIA 449 with MIL-STD-188-114 Single HSSI interface 10/100 Base-T Ethernet data interface (optional) Dual Ethernet 10/100BaseT + Single HSSI (optional) 37 pin, D-sub (F), standard for EIA/TIA 449 Data interface 25 pin, D-sub (F), optional for RS530 Data interface 50 pin SCSI-2 connector (F) for HSSI Data RJ-45 for Ethernet option(s) Internal or External (internal clock to be extracted from data, with up to 50 consecutive 1s or 0s, which occurs no more than once in 10 kbits, and data is within 100 ppm) Max of 10% of bit period Data Rate Options available Symbol Rate Data and Clock Interfaces Data Connectors Data Clock Source Data and Clock Timing Jitter, Input Demand Clock Accuracy Distortion Data Scrambling Modes Differential Encoding Modes Local / Remote Monitor & Control Interfaces Modulation Type & FEC Rate 64 Kbps to 8472 kbps 64 kbps to 20,000 kbps 1,544 kbps to 51,840 kbps Up to 52 Mbps using eTPC and HSSI interface -7 1 x 10 Stability 1 hr after warm-up -8 1 x 10 Stability/day (accuracy shall conform to external reference w/o warm-up) Per EIA-334, or 5 nanoseconds, whichever is greater No Scrambling IESS-308; IESS-309; IESS-310 OM-73(V)/G (BPSK, QPSK and OQPSK) Off; per IESS-308/309/310; special per MIL-STD-188-165A for BPSK/OQPSK 9 pin D-sub (F) for RS-232 Serial interfaces 15 pin D-sub (F) for Alarm interface (switch-over contact) Continuous Wave (CW) BPSK: Intelsat 1/2,3/4,7/8 Viterbi DVB 1/2, 2/3, 3/4, 5/6, 7/8 Viterbi with RS (204,188) Outer Code, Optional eTPC Rate 2/5 ,3/5, 3/4, 4/5, 7/8, 8/9, 19/20 (refer to Chapter 9) QPSK / OQPSK: Intelsat 1/2, 3/4, 7/8 Selectable Intelsat (219,201) for data rates ≥ 512 kbps or RS (126,112) Outer Code (QPSK only) for data rates ≤ 512 kbps DVB 1/2, 2/3, 3/4, 5/6, 7/8 with RS (204,188), Optional eTPC Rate 2/5, 3/5, 3/4, 4/5, 7/8, 8/9, 19/20, (refer to Chapter 9) 8PSK: Intelsat IESS-310 2/3 PTCM Inner code Selectable Intelsat (219,201) or RS (126,112) Outer Code DVB-DSNG PTCM Rate 2/3, 5/6, 8/9 with RS(204,188), Optional eTPC Rate 3/5,3/4, 4/5, 7/8, 8/9, 19/20, (refer to Chapter 9) Modulation Roll-Off Factor Modulation Timing Jitter Modulation Phase Error 16QAM, Optional: DVB-DSNG PTCM Rate 3/4, 7/8 with RS(204,188) code eTPC Rate 3/4, 4/5, 7/8, 8/9, 19/20 (refer to Chapter 9) 23% Alpha Raised Cosine Filter to MIL-188-165A standard < 3% peak of modulation symbol period o <2 20 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation DESCRIPTION Configurable Forward Error Correction RF Output Connector RF Output Frequency Group Delay Variation Spectral Inversion Phase Noise Phase Perturbation RF Output Power RF Output Spurious RF Output Harmonics Modulator to Demodulator Isolation Equipment Reference Frequency & Phase Noise, Internal DEMODULATOR RF Input Connector RF Input RF Noise Figure RF Frequency Uncertainty, Min. SPECIFICATION Rate 1/2, 2/3, 3/4, 5/6 and 7/8 convolutional encoding K=7. Optional: Reed Solomon outer (based on DVB-S/DVB-DSNG standards) with convolutional inner coding or Enhanced Turbo code rate range: between 0.448 and 0.914 (see Chapter 9). Intelsat FEC rates from 16kbps to 52 Mbps (8PSK) DVB compliant rates from 64kbps to 110 Mbps Turbo data rates from 64 kbps to 140 Mbps TNC (f) Connector, labeled as J1 Impedance: 50 Ω Return Loss: ≥14 dB, 950-1750 MHz; ≥10 dB, 1000-2000 MHz L-Band: 950 to 2000 MHz, variable in 100 Hz steps -8 Stability: 1 x 10 per day -7 -7 Frequency Stability: 1 x 10 after 1 hr warm-up internal; 1 x 10 w/o warm-up, external Per MIL-STD 188-165A requirements No Inversion. Modulation spectral inversion is programmable. o Integrated Single sideband from 10 Hz to 100 MHz: 2.8 RMS Max Output Phase Noise (by offset): -42 dBc/Hz at 10 Hz -72 dBc/Hz at 100 Hz -82 dBc/Hz at 1 kHz -92 dBc/Hz at 10 kHz -102 dBc/Hz at 100 kHz -112 dBc/Hz at 1 MHz -122 dBc/Hz at 10 to 100 MHz o Linear phase: <20 in 0.2 seconds under following conditions: o Temperature: Rate of change shall be 22 /Hr Vibration: Between 50-2,000 Hz with constant input acceleration of 1.5 gf/Hr. Shock: Impact of test hammer of 1 lb. attached to 8” arm through vertical plane; striking face covered with ½” open cell sponge rubber with the following: Density: 0.027 lbs/cubic inch Compression Deflection: 7-14 lb/sq in for 25% deflection o Swing: Free swing through 90 arc – impact enclosure at bottom of swing Range: 0 to -25 dBm, adjustable in 0.10 dB increments, monotonic transitions w/o burst errors Accuracy: ± 0.5 dB Temp Stability: ± 0.25 dB Off Condition: -60 dBm in any 3 MHz B/W from 0-4000 MHz -51 dBc > 64 kbps; -46 dBc ≤ 64 kbps (optional) th ≥ -60 dBc up to 12 harmonic or 4 GHz, whichever is greater -5 Contribution < 0.2 dB @10 BER over any Tx freq/pwr level from Tx off Reference Frequency: 10 MHz External Ref Level: 0 dBm ± 2 dB Internal Freq Stability: Stratum-1 (0.15 ppm due to all sources) Max External Reference Phase Noise (by offset): -115 dBc/Hz at 10 Hz -135 dBc/Hz at 100 Hz -148 dBc/Hz at 1 kHz -150 dBc/Hz at 10 kHz -160 dBc/Hz at 100 kHz Connector: TNC (f), labeled as J2 Impedance: 50 Ω Return Loss: ≥14 dB, 950-1750 MHz; ≥10 dB, 1000-2000 MHz 950 MHz to 2000 MHz (min) / 100 Hz step size 9 dB typical; 12 dB at maximum AGC gain +30 kHz including Doppler offset 21 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation DESCRIPTION SPECIFICATION RF Input Power (See for Input Power versus Symbol Rate) Receive Phase Perturbation BER shall not change with the following: Desired Carrier: -45 dBm - 10log (40000/R) dBm (where R = Symbol Rate in kSymbols) AGC Range: +20 dB Max. Composite Input Power: Sum of all carriers ≤ +20 dBm; within 10 MHz ≤30 dBc; ≤+40 dBc Input Overload: No damage by continuous IF input of ≤25 dBm o Linear phase: <20 in 0.2 seconds under following conditions: o Temperature: Rate of change shall be 22 /Hr Vibration: Between 50-2,000 Hz with constant input acceleration of 1.5 gf/Hr. Shock: Impact of test hammer of 1 lb. attached to 8” arm through vertical plane; striking face covered with ½” open cell sponge rubber with the following: Density: 0.027 lbs/cubic inch Compression Deflection: 7-14 lb/sq in for 25% deflection o Swing: Free swing through 90 arc – impact enclosure at bottom of swing Data Rate (mandatory) BPSK QPSK/OQPSK 8PSK/TCM 8PSK/16QAM Data Rate Options Symbol Rate Acquisition Range -3 Acquisition Time (BER of 10 Viterbi with +30 kHz frequency uncertainty) -3 Timing (10 BER Viterbi) Doppler (Min. Requirements) BER Performance (with scrambler/differential encoder enabled), in dB Viterbi BER -3 10 -5 10 -6 10 -7 10 Viterbi w / RS -5 10 -6 10 -7 10 eTPC (Optional) BER Degradation with Adjacent Channel Carriers (subtract from Eb/No values, above) Demodulator-to-Demodulator Isolation 64 Kbps to 8472 kbps 64 kbps to 20,000 kbps 1,544 kbps to 51,840 kbps Up to 52 Mbps using eTPC and HSSI interface Up to 110Mbps in optional 16QAM Turbo mode 16kbps to 10Mbps, 20Mbps, 52Mbps and 140Mbps 32 KSymbol to 30 MSymbol Data Rate Max. Initial Acquisition Max. Reacquisition < 30 seconds < 50 seconds ≥16 kbps < 15 seconds < 25 seconds ≥ 64 kbps < 10 seconds < 15 seconds ≥ 128 kbps < 1 second < 1.5 seconds ≥ 1.544 Mbps Bit Count Integrity (BCI): No false additions/deletions in 7 days with up to 50 consecutive 1’s or 0’s without data scrambling. Synchronization Retention: Per MIL-STD-188-165A Timing Jitter: ≤ +5% with modulated jitter ≤ 3% Doppler Parameter L Band Shift in Hz +1,200 Rate of Change (Hz/sec) +110 2 Acceleration (Hz/sec ) +120 ½ QPSK ¾ QPSK 7/8 QPSK 2/3 TCM 8PSK Uncoded Viterbi Viterbi Viterbi Viterbi (No FEC) 4.0 5.5 6.1 6.7 5.5 6.9 7.5 8.1 6.5 7.8 8.5 9.1 6.6 8.0 9.6 10.4 4.4 4.5 4.6 5.7 5.8 6.1 6.6 6.8 6.9 6.5 6.8 7.0 8.5 10.9 11.9 12.8 Two like carriers each 10 dB above wanted carrier (range dependant on Es/No) Symmetrical (channel Spacing) Asymmetrical (channel spacing) 1.2 x Data Rate 1.4 x Data rate 1.2 x Data Rate 1.4 x Data rate ≤ 0.36 to 0.99 dB ≤ 0.41 to 1.21 dB -5 < 0.2 dB with Eb/No @ BER = 10 ≤ 0.38 to 1.01 dB ≤ 0.43 to 1.23 dB 22 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation DESCRIPTION Demodulator Type & FEC Rate SPECIFICATION BPSK: Intelsat 1/2,3/4,7/8 DVB 1/2, 2/3, 3/4, 5/6, 7/8 with RS (204,188) Outer Code, Optional eTPC Rate 2/5, 3/5, 3/4, 4/5, 7/8, 8/9, 19/20 (refer to Chapter 9), Optional QPSK / OQPSK: Intelsat 1/2, 3/4, 7/8 Selectable Intelsat (219,201) or RS (126,112) Outer Code DVB 1/2, 2/3, 3/4, 5/6, 7/8 with RS (204,188), Optional eTPC Rate 2/5, 3/5, 3/4, 4/5, 7/8, 8/9, 19/20 (refer to Chapter 9), Optional 8PSK: Intelsat IESS310 2/3 PTCM Inner code Selectable Intelsat (219,201) or RS (126,112) Outer Code DVB-DSNG PTCM Rate 2/3, 5/6, 8/9 with RS(204,188), Optional eTPC Rate 3/5, 3/4, 4/5, 7/8, 8/9, 19/20 (refer to Chapter 9), Optional Data Descrambling Modes Differential Decoding Modes 16QAM: DVB-DSNG PTCM Rate 3/4, 7/8 with RS(204,188) code, Optional eTPC Rate 3/4, 4/5, 7/8, 8/9, 19/20 (refer to Chapter 9), Optional None IESS-308; IESS-309; IESS-310 OM-73(V)/G (BPSK, QPSK and OQPSK) Off; per IESS-308/309/310; special per MIL-STD-188-165A for BPSK/OQPSK DATA & MANAGEMENT INTERFACES Data Interfaces Monitoring & Control (M&C) M&C Control Response Times Monitor and Control Functions (Min) Eb/No Automatic Reporting and Accuracy EIA/TIA-449 / MIL-STD-188-114; DB-37(f) connector; labeled J8 Single HSSI interface; 50 pin (f) HSSI connector, labeled J18 Optional RS530 connector and 10/100 Base-T Ethernet Active Front Panel: as standard M&C Asynchronous Serial Interfaces: RS-232 terminal mode, 9-pin D (f); RS485 packet mode, 9-pin D (f) Ethernet M&C Interface: 10/100Base-T for SNMP, Telnet or HTTP Configuration Parameter Storage: NVRAM ≤ 0.25 seconds Control Monitoring Data Rate (Tx/Rx) Data Rate (Tx/Rx) Modulation Type (Tx/Rx) Modulation Type (Tx/Rx) Differential Coding (Tx/Rx) Differential Coding (Tx/Rx) Scrambling (Tx/Rx) Scrambling (Tx/Rx) FEC Coding, Inner/Outer (Tx/Rx) FEC Coding, Inner/Outer (Tx/Rx) R/S Interleaver Depth (Tx Rx) R/S Interleaver Depth (Tx Rx) IF Carrier Frequency (Tx/Rx) IF Carrier Frequency (Tx/Rx) Transmit IF Power On/Off Transmit IF Power On/Off Transmit IF Power Level Transmit IF Power Level Frequency Reference Source Fault Status Stored Faults Received Eb/No Acquisition Indicator Rcv. Signal Power Level Bit Synchronization Indicator (Tx/Rx) Interval: ≤ 1 second Accuracy: 0.35 dB over the range from -3 to -20 dB Eb/No 23 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation DESCRIPTION 5 MHz Reference (IAW MIL-STD-188-115), Input PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS Physical Dimensions Power AC Chassis Ground Environmental Electromagnetic Emissions (measured at 1 Meter) SPECIFICATION Reference Frequency: 5 MHz Connector: BNC female, labeled J14 External Ref Level: 0 dBm ± 2 dB Max External Reference Phase Noise (to meet Tx/Rx Phase Noise): -115 dBc/Hz at 10 Hz -135 dBc/Hz at 100 Hz -148 dBc/Hz at 1 kHz -150 dBc/Hz at 10 kHz -160 dBc/Hz at 100 kHz The AMT-73L is a rack-mountable 1RU EIA chassis. Height: 4.4 cm (1.75") Width: 43.2 cm (17") Depth: 52 cm (20.56") Weight: 12 lb maximum AC: Auto-sensing 90-264 VAC, 47-63 Hz Typical Power Dissipation: 58 Watts typical Connector: IEC 320 with retention cap. Power Cord: 6 ft. with NEMA 5-15P connector Modem to operate without interruption/degradation of performance during switchover in power from a 120 VAC 60 Hz to a 220 VAC 50 Hz source with a loss in power less than 20 ms. 10-32 stud Operating Temperature: 0°C to 56°C o o Storage Temperature: -40 C to 71 C Relative Humidity, Operating: 5-95% non-condensing Relative Humidity, Non-Operating: 5-100% Altitude, Operational: Up to 10,000 ft. referenced to sea level Altitude, Non-Operational: -120 to 40,000 ft. during transit Shock, Non-Operational: Withstand 2.3 G’s sinusoidal shock, any axis, with 20.0 millisecond duration Transportation Vibration: Power Spectral Densities to be met in 3 axis 25 – 70 dBu Volts/Meter from 2 to 20 GHz with 10 kHz to 1 MHz BW, a dwell time of 0.015, and a measurement time of 1.5 sec/MHz to 15.0 sec/GHz 24 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (AMT-75) The specifications listed for the Modulator are just for the DVB-S2 option. The modulator can also support all of the AMT70 options listed in the AMT70 technical specification. DESCRIPTION MODULATOR SPECIFICATION Data Rate Data Rate Options Symbol Rate Data Interfaces 64 Kbps to 140 Mbps 16kbps to 10Mbps, 20Mbps, 52Mbps and 140Mbps 128 KSymbol to 40 MSymbol RS 530 / V35 (standard) ASI (optional) Single HSSI interface(standard) Triple HSSI (optional) Ethernet 10/100BaseT (optional) Dual Ethernet 10/100BaseT + Single HSSI (optional) G.703 (optional) 1 to 8 X E1/T1 (optional) 9 pin D-sub (F) for RS-232 Serial interface 9 pin /d-sub (F) for RS-485 Serial interface (Terminal mode and packet protocol mode) 15 pin D-sub (F) for Alarm interface (switch-over contact) RJ-45 10/100BaseT Ethernet 25 pin, D-sub (F), standard for RS530 Data interface BNC (F) - 75 Ω for ASI and E3/T3 G.703 interfaces 50 pin SCSI-2 connector (F) for HSSI Data RJ-45 for Ethernet option and for balanced bi-directional E1/T1 interface with Octal E1/T1 card Modulator will be defined as Data Communications Equipment (DCE) Continuous Wave (CW) Local / Remote Monitor & Control Interfaces Data Connector Data Clock Source DVB-S2 Modulation Type & FEC Rate QPSK: 64Kbps to 70Mbps DVB-S2 SHORT and NORMAL FEC Block 1 2 1 3 2 4 5 8 SHORT Block 16kbit ¼, /3, /5, /2, /5, /3, /5, /6, /9 1 2 1 3 2 4 5 8 9 NORMAL Block 64kbit ¼, /3, /5, /2, /5, /3, /5, /6, /9, /10 8PSK: 256kbps to 110Mbps DVB-S2 SHORT and NORMAL FEC Block 3 2 3 5 8 SHORT Block 16kbit /5, /3, /4, /6, /9 3 2 3 5 8 9 NORMAL Block 64kbit /5, /3, /4, /6, /9, /10 16APSK: 340kbps to 140Mbps DVB-S2 SHORT and NORMAL FEC Block 2 3 4 5 8 SHORT Block 16kbit /3, /4, /5, /6, /9 2 3 4 5 8 9 NORMAL Block 64kbit /3, /4, /5, /6, /9, /10 32APSK: 470kbps to 175Mbps DVB-S2 SHORT and NORMAL FEC Block 3 4 5 8 SHORT Block 16kbit /4, /5, /6, /9 3 4 5 8 9 NORMAL Block 64kbit /4, /5, /6, /9, /10 25 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation DESCRIPTION Modulation Type & FEC Rate SPECIFICATION BPSK: Intelsat 1/2,3/4,7/8 Viterbi DVB 1/2, 2/3, 3/4, 5/6, 7/8 Viterbi with RS (204,188) Outer Code, Optional eTPC Rate 2/5, 3/5, 4/5, 8/9, 19/20 (refer to Chapter 9) rd 3 party TPC ¾, 7/8 QPSK / OQPSK: Intelsat 1/2, 3/4, 7/8 Selectable Intelsat (219,201) for data rates ≥ 512 kbps or RS (126,112) Outer Code (QPSK only) for data rates ≤ 512 kbps DVB 1/2, 2/3, 3/4, 5/6, 7/8 with RS (204,188), Optional eTPC Rate 2/5, 3/5, 4/5, 8/9, 19/20 (refer to Chapter 9) rd 3 party TPC ¾, 7/8 8PSK: Intelsat IESS-310 2/3 PTCM Inner code Selectable Intelsat (219,201) or RS (126,112) Outer Code DVB-DSNG PTCM Rate 2/3, 5/6, 8/9 with RS(204,188), Optional eTPC Rate 2/5, 3/5, 4/5, 8/9, 19/20 (refer to Chapter 9) rd 3 party TPC ¾, 7/8 16QAM, Optional: DVB-DSNG PTCM Rate 3/4, 7/8 with RS(204,188) code eTPC Rate 2/5, 3/5, 4/5, 8/9, 19/20 (refer to Chapter 9) rd 3 party TPC ¾, 7/8 Modulation Roll-Off Factor Configurable Forward Error Correction 12% to 35% with 1% resolution Intelsat 308/309 DVB-S/DVB-DSNG Coding ETPC (as AMT70) DVB-S2 SHORT and NORMAL FEC Block * 1 * 2 * 1 * 3 2 4 5 7 8 SHORT Block 16kbit ¼ , /3 , /5 , /2 , /5, /3, /5, /6, /8, /9 * 1 * 2 * 1 * 3 2 4 5 7 8 9 NORMAL Block 64kbit ¼ , /3 , /5 , /2 , /5, /3, /5, /6, /8, /9, /10 RF Output Connector * Only available in QPSK according to DVB-S2 Specification N-type, (F) for L-Band BNC (F) for 70 and 140MHz output Impedance: 50 Ω Return Loss: ≥10 dB RF Output Frequency L-Band: 950 to 1750 MHz, option to 2000MHz, variable in 100 Hz steps IF Band: 70 +/-18 MHz or 950-2000MHz 140 +/-36 MHz or 950-2000MHz RF Output Power Range: 0 to -25 dBm, adjustable in 0.10 dB increments Accuracy: ± 0.5 dB Temp Stability: ± 0.25 dB Reference Frequency: 10 MHz External Ref Level: 0 dBm ± 2 dB Internal Freq Stability: Stratum-1 (0.15 ppm due to all sources) Equipment Reference Frequency & Phase Noise BUC Supply 24V or 48V DC (Optional) DEMODULATOR Data Rate Data Rate Options Symbol Rate Data Scrambling Polynomial 16 Kbps to 150 Mbps, variable 16kbps to 10Mbps, 20Mbps, 52Mbps and 150Mbps 128 KSymbol to 45 MSymbol Intelsat V.35 or Intelsat Synchronous or DVB Compliant 26 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation DESCRIPTION SPECIFICATION DVB-S2 Demodulator Type & FEC Rate BPSK: Intelsat 1/2,3/4,7/8 DVB 1/2, 2/3, 3/4, 5/6, 7/8 with RS (204,188) Outer Code Turbo not available at launch will be a future Upgrade QPSK / OQPSK: Intelsat 1/2, 3/4, 7/8 Selectable Intelsat (219,201) or RS (126,112) Outer Code, Optional DVB 1/2, 2/3, 3/4, 5/6, 7/8 with RS (204,188), Optional DVB-S2 supported as Modulator (see Modulator box for details) Turbo not available at launch will be a future Upgrade 8PSK: Intelsat IESS310 2/3 PTCM Inner code Selectable Intelsat (219,201) or RS (126,112) Outer Code, Optional DVB-DSNG PTCM Rate 2/3, 5/6, 8/9 with RS(204,188), Optional DVB-S2 supported as Modulator Turbo not available at launch will be a future Upgrade 16QAM: DVB-DSNG PTCM Rate 3/4, 7/8 with RS(204,188) code, Optional Turbo not available at launch will be a future Upgrade 16APSK: DVB-S2 supported as Modulator 32APSK: DVB-S2 supported as Modulator 27 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation DESCRIPTION Modulation Type & FEC Rate SPECIFICATION BPSK: Intelsat 1/2,3/4,7/8 Viterbi DVB 1/2, 2/3, 3/4, 5/6, 7/8 Viterbi with RS (204,188) Outer Code, Optional eTPC Rate 3/5, 4/5, 8/9, 19/20 (refer to Chapter 9) rd 3 party TPC ½, ¾, 7/8, 19/20 AMT75 ONLY TPC Code Block Size Maximum bit rate Mb/s AMT70 3/5 16K 12 AMT70 4/5 4K 14 AMT70 8/9 16K 22 AMT70 19/20 16K 26 rd 3 Party 1/2 10 rd 3 Party 3/4 4K 13 rd 3 Party 7/8 16k 29 rd 3 Party 19/20 24 QPSK / OQPSK: Intelsat 1/2, 3/4, 7/8 Selectable Intelsat (219,201) for data rates ≥ 512 kbps or RS (126,112) Outer Code (QPSK only) for data rates ≤ 512 kbps DVB 1/2, 2/3, 3/4, 5/6, 7/8 with RS (204,188), Optional eTPC Rate 3/5, 4/5, 8/9, 19/20 (refer to Chapter 9) rd 3 party TPC ½, ¾, 7/8, 19/20 8PSK: Intelsat IESS-310 2/3 PTCM Inner code Selectable Intelsat (219,201) or RS (126,112) Outer Code DVB-DSNG PTCM Rate 2/3, 5/6, 8/9 with RS(204,188), Optional eTPC Rate 3/5, 4/5, 8/9, 19/20 (refer to Chapter 9) rd 3 party TPC ½, ¾, 7/8, 19/20 16QAM, Optional: DVB-DSNG PTCM Rate 3/4, 7/8 with RS(204,188) code eTPC Rate 3/5, 4/5, 8/9, 19/20 (refer to Chapter 9) rd 3 party TPC ½, ¾, 7/8, 19/20 IF Input (Option) 2 x BNC, (F) for 70 MHz / 140 MHz Impedance: 50 Ω Return Loss: ≥10 dB RF Input (See A.2.7 for Input Power versus Symbol Rate) 2 x F-type, (F) for 950MHz to 2150MHz Impedance: 75 Ω Return Loss: ≥9 dB Input Level: 10Log (Symbol Rate) -100 dBm, +12 dB Maximum Composite Input Power: -20dBm Refer to Figure 6 for Viterbi and Viterbi with Reed Solomon FEC. Refer to Chapter 18 for DVB-S2 Theoretical Performance Refer to Chapter 9 for eTPC FEC. QPSK 8PSK 16QAM/16APSK <0.5dBmargin N/A N/A <0.5dB margin <0.5dB margin <0.7dBmargin <1.0 margin <0.7dB margin <1.0 margin BER Performance and Channel Spacing Typical Eb/No Performance against theory DVB-S DVB-DSNG DVB-S2 LNB Supply Voltage LNB Signals 32APSK N/A N/A <1.5 margin 13V or 18V switchable 450 mA maximum 22 kHz switching tone available 10 MHz reference output (nominal 0.5V p-p) 28 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation DESCRIPTION SPECIFICATION DATA & MANAGEMENT INTERFACES Monitoring & Control (M&C) Data Interfaces Receiver ASI Interface Front Panel: as standard External M&C Interface: 10/100Base-T, RS-232, RS-485, SNMP (future option) Configuration Parameter Storage: NVRAM RS 530 / V35 (standard) ASI (optional) Single HSSI interface (standard) Triple HSSI interface (optional) Ethernet 10/100 Base-T (optional) Dual Ethernet + Single HSSI interface (optional) G.703 (optional) Nx T1/E1(optional) Encoded Line Rate: 270 MSymbol ± 100 ppm Min Sensitivity (D21.5 idle pattern): 200 mV Max Input Voltage: 880 mV p-p Discrete Connector Return Loss: ≥15 dB Max. Distance: 150 m PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS Physical Dimensions Power AC (DC Optional) Environmental The AMT-70 is a rack-mountable 1RU EIA chassis. Height: 4.4 cm (1.75") Width: 43.2 cm (17") without ears and 48.26cm (19”) with ears Depth: 40.6 cm (16") Weight: 11 lb (5 kg) maximum AC: Auto sensing 95-265 VAC, 50/60 Hz DC: 48 VDC (+32 to +72 VDC) Typical Power Dissipation: 50 W without LNB/BUC power supply 65 W when powering LNB/BDC 150 W when powering BUC and LNB/BDC Operating Temperature: 0°C to 45°C (32°F to 122°F) o o o o Storage Temperature: -25 C to 85 C (-13 F to 185 F) Relative Humidity: up to 90% non-condensing, operating; up to 95% non-condensing, storage Altitude: Up to 10,000 ft (3,045 m) operating; to 40,000 ft (12,180 m) during transit 29 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation STANDARDS COMPLIANCE Telecommunication Interface Standards The AMT-70 modem is compliant to the following interface standards; IEEE RS-422 / RS-449 / RS-530 and CCITT/ITU V.35 interface standards ITU G.703: Physical Electrical Characteristics of Hierarchical Digital Interface. 10/100Base-T Ethernet: IEEE Standard for Information technology--Telecommunications and information exchange between systems--Local and metropolitan area networks-Specific requirements--Part 3: Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Collision Detection (CSMA/CD) Access Method and Physical Layer Specifications HSSI Design Specification, written by John T. Chapman and Mitri Halabi, Revision 2.11, dated March 16, 1990 and Addendum Issue #1, dated January 23, 1991. DVB-DSNG: ETSI Standards EN310 210 v1.1.1 Digital Video Broadcasting (DVB); Framing structure, channel coding and modulation for Digital Satellite News Gathering (DSNG) and other contribution applications by satellite Intelsat Earth Station Standards (IESS) Documents (IESS 308/309/310/315): “Performance Characteristics for Intermediate Data Rate Digital Carriers using Convolutional Encoder / Viterbi Decoding and QPSK, 8PSK modulations.” In addition, the AMT-73 shall be compliant to the following documents: Military Specifications MIL-P-116 Preservation, Methods MIL-P-53022B Primer, Epoxy Coating, Corrosion Inhibiting, Lead and Chromate Free MIL-E-17555 Electronic and Electrical Equipment, Accessories and Provisioned Items (Repair Parts) Military Standards MIL-STD-129 Standard Practice for Military Marking MIL-STD-130K Identification Marking of U.S. Military Property MIL-STD 188-114 Electrical Characteristics of Digital Interface Circuits MIL-STD-165A Interoperability of SHF Satellite Communications PSK Modems (FDMA Operation) MIL-STD- 810F Environmental Engineering Considerations and Laboratory Tests MIL-STD-889 Dissimilar Metals MIL-STD-2073-1 Preservation, Methods MIL-HDBK-454 General Requirements for Electronic Equipment Other 30 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation Non-Government Documents NEC National Electric Code; by the National Fire Protection Code (NFPA) FED-STD-595 Federal Colors Standard 595 EIA/TIA-449 General Purpose 37-Pin and 9-Pin Interface for Data Terminal Equipment and Data Circuit-Terminating Equipment Employing Serial Binary Data Interchange 31 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION The AMT-70 modem supports all the major satellite standards, both Intelsat and DVB, in a one rack unit chassis, if the appropriate options are enabled. The modem can also be ordered with a Turbo Product Code and DVB-S2 FEC options. The modem is available in both 70MHz, 140 MHz and LBand versions. This versatile unit can be used as a standalone satellite modem, a standalone DVB Modulator as a universal test source for satellite demodulator testing, or for monitoring applications. This modem supports most of the synchronous voice / data / video multiplexer interfaces on the market for interconnectivity to backbone networks. The AMT-70 modem family now includes inbuilt Network Management functions for local and remote management via 10/100 Base-T Ethernet offering Telnet and SNMP management, RS-232 or RS-485. Front Panel control is also available. 1.1 The AMT-7X Family The AMT-70 modem is a member of the AMT-7x family. These modems are available in many configurations: Model Description AMT-70 High-speed modem with one modulator and one demodulator. Interfaces include, RS-530 to 10Mbps and HSSI to 52Mbps and optionally Ethernet router (10/100 Base-T) to 20 Mbps and ASI or Triple HSSI to 140Mbps. AMT-70 High-speed modem with one modulator and one demodulator. Interfaces include up to 8xE1/T1, 10/100 Base-, RS530, 2xFXS connections and an overhead channel. (Octal T1/E1)) AMT-70 (Fast Ethernet) AMT-70 (High-Performance IP router) AMT-73L (Meets MIL STD 188-65A) AMT-70 (TX Only) AMT-75 Dual 10/100 base-T full duplex Ethernet ports with additional RS530 serial interface. Allows Ethernet traffic up to 90Mbps and the IP traffic can be bridged or statically or dynamically routed in the Modem. Dual 10/100 base-T full duplex Ethernet ports with additional HSSI interface. Allows Ethernet traffic up to 67Mbps and the IP traffic can be bridged, statically or dynamically routed in the Modem. Very high-speed modem that meets or exceeds MIL-STD 188-165A requirements. Operates in L band Transmit and L band Receive. Interfaces includes EIA/TIA-449/MIL-STD-188-165A and HSSI to 52 Mbps. Very high-speed modulator. Interfaces include RS-530 to 10Mbps and HSSI to 52 Mbps and optionally Ethernet (10/100 Base-T) to 90 Mbps and ASI or Triple HSSI to 140Mbps. DVB-S / DVB-DSNG / Turbo / Intelsat modulation DVB-S2 Broadcast Modem including all the features of the AMT-70 but with DVB-S2 and with ASI interface. Available as a Modem or Modulator 32 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation only or Demodulator Card. Can be ordered with any of the AMT70 series Interface cards. AMT-75R Single or Dual DVB-S2 receiver with associated ASI, Ethernet or HSSI outputs. SBR-70 / SBR75 Single Board Demodulator Card. The SBR70 supports Intelsat, Turbo, DVB-S and DVB-DSNG and the SBR-75 supports DVB-S2. Figure 1: The AMT-7x Family 1+1 redundancy is available today on a wide variety of data interfaces. N+1 will be available in 2006. 1.2 Product Overview 1.2.1 AMT-70/75 Description The AMT-70 product has one modulator and demodulator. A modulator-only product is available, typically for broadcasting video or IP data applications. The demodulator can be sold separately as a standalone card or in single or Dual AMT75 receive only 19inch rack mount units. The modem can also equipped with an internal router. For modems supplied with internal routers, see also Appendix C 1. The typical features of the modems include: L-Band output of 950-1750 MHz, optional to 2000 MHz; L-Band input of 950-2150 MHz tunable in 1 Hz steps Optional IF interface: 70+/-18 MHz or 140+/-36 MHz Provision of DC power and reference for Low Noise Block Down Converter (LNB) / Block Down Converter (BDC) and Block Up Converter (BUC) FEC: RSV (both Intelsat and DVB-S/DSNG), eTPC and DVB-S2(AMT75) BPSK/QPSK/8PSK/16QAM/OQPSK/16APSK/32APSK modulation FFT Technology for reliable acquisition Occupies 1 Rack Unit (RU) of Rack Space (1.75”) Power Consumption less than 60 W (not including BUC power supply) Full Monitor and Control Capability using a VT100 type (RS-232) terminal, Telnet, FTP, SNMP (10/100 Base-T Ethernet), and command mode (RS-485). Optional 48 VDC input power Optional BUC power supply voltages and currents ASI (Digital Video), RS-530, 10/100 Base-T Ethernet, Telecomm E1/T1 and HSSI data interfaces supported AMT75 series includes DVB-S2 and LDPC coding both Short(16k) and Normal(64k) blocks On the back panel, there are 10/100 Base-T Ethernet, RS-232 and RS-485 serial bus (M&C) interfaces. An Alarm/Relay connector provides simple redundancy switching capability. 1 Please refer to Advantech’s ‘Communication Processor’ Manual for operational instructions of the router feature. 33 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation The modem’s standard data interface is a synchronous RS-530 interface (25-pin D-sub connector). Through the use of interface cables, the data port can be converted to a synchronous RS-530/422 interface (37-pin D-sub connector) or a V.35 interface (34-pin Winchester connector). HSSI (High Speed Serial Interface) is also available: the base AMT-70 supports HSSI operation up to 60 Mbps (higher speeds are available with option cards). The DVB/ASI interface can also be supported. Two ASI connectors are provided; one for the modulator data input and one for the demodulator data output. The Modem can be controlled and monitored via a variety of protocols from simple RS232, RS485 or Telnet Command Line Interface (CLI), RS485 Packet Protocol, SNMP via Ethernet or Webserver. The AMT-70 series modems are powered from a universal power supply with a range from 96 to 263 VAC, 47-63 Hz. The modem is also capable of powering an LNB/BDC (24 VDC, 0.45 A) if this power supply is fitted. Finally, the standard BUC power supply produces 24 VDC at a maximum of 3.5 A (Max 110 W). Optionally, the BUC power supply can be upgraded to 48 VDC, 2.2 A. 1.2.2 AMT-73L Description The AMT-73L product has one modulator and demodulator. It fully meets MIL-STD-188-165A standard. It has the following features: L-Band output of 950-2000 MHz, tunable in 1 Hz steps; L-Band input of 950-2000 MHz tunable in 1 Hz steps Optionally support to 2050MHz on both TX and RX Optional IF interface: 70+/-18 MHz, 140+/-36 MHz Optional provision of DC power and reference for Low Noise Block Down Converter (LNB) / Block Down Converter (BDC) and Block Up Converter (BUC) FEC: RSV (both Intelsat and DVB-S/DSNG) and eTPC BPSK/QPSK/8PSK/16QAM/OQPSK modulation FFT Technology for reliable acquisition Occupies 1 Rack Unit (RU) of Rack Space (1.75”) Power Consumption less than 60 W (not including BUC power supply) Full Monitor and Control Capability using a VT100 type (RS-232) terminal, Telnet, FTP, (10/100 Base-T Ethernet), and command mode (RS-485). Optional 48 VDC input power Optional BUC power supply voltages and currents EIA/TIA-449, HSSI and Ethernet data interfaces supported On the back panel, there are 10/100 Base-T Ethernet, RS-232 and RS-485 serial bus (M&C) interfaces. An Alarm/Relay connector provides simple redundancy switching capability. The modem’s standard data interface is a synchronous EIA/TIA-449 interface (37-D-sub connector). HSSI (High Speed Serial Interface) is also available: the base AMT-73L supports HSSI operation up to 52 Mbps (higher speeds are available with other option cards). The AMT-73 series are powered from a universal power supply with a range from 96 to 263 VAC, 47-63 Hz. 34 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation 1.3 Ordering the Products Options Specific configuration options must be specified at ordering in order to customize your modem specifically for your configuration. The chart on the next page depicts the options available for the AMT-70 modem family. Caution should be taken to insure that the correct modem model is used when DC power is applied to the BUC. When your modem is received, you can check the manufacturing setting by using the label on the top of the modem, centered and near the front panel. It provides the Model Number, Part Number (the configuration options) the Revision Number, and the Serial Number. 35 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation 1 A R OPTION "R" REDUNDANCY OPTIONS 0 1 2 3 4 ** C L + 70MHz Rx (U/C + L-Band Tuner) 0 A B C D E F G H J K L M Not Fitted 950 - 1750 MHz 950 - 2000 MHz 70 MHz or 140MHz 950 - 2000 MHz and 70/140 MHz MD 70 MHz or 950-2000 MHz 140 MHz or 950-2000 MHz Option A + ASI Option B + ASI Option E + ASI Option F + ASI * 3 4 Ω DVB-S2 Demodulator (L Band ) 75 Ω 6 DUAL DVB-S2 Demod (L Band ) 75 Ω 9 Option 3 + ASI A Option 5 + ASI B Option 6 + ASI C DVB-S2 Demodulator (70MHz) D DVB-S2 Demodulator (140MHz) E Option C + ASI F Option D + ASI (Astra 688) RS-530 + 8 x G.703 + 1x IP (40M) (Centaur 700) (SMC 619-004) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 RS-530 + HSSI + 2xIP(67M) + APOC (Aleph 714) *IDR/IBS + G703 Option H + ASI 3 x DS3 (IBS/IDR 642) (Under development) *RS-530 + HSSI + IP(20M) *HSSI + IP(20M) (SMC+Aero+SW 746) RS530 + 4 x G.703 + IP RS-530 + HSSI + ASI(Tx) A B C D E F G H J K L M N P R S T U V (SMC+Aero 668) (Daisy 770) Front Panel with Display, Keypad and LED Indicators Front Panel with LED Indicators only Option 1 + Dial-up Modem MD Option 2 + Dial-up Modem MD Option 1 + SNMP Option 2 + SNMP Option 1 + Dial-up Modem + SNMP MD Note: In OPTION “F”, for RX only units, available options are 2 or 6 . (SMC 619-005) OPTION "P" POWER & REFERENCE OPTIONS A B C D E F G H J K L 10 Mbits/s 20 Mbits/s 52 Mbits/s 140 Mbits/s INTELSAT BPSK/QPSK + Viterbi (IESS 308/309) INTELSAT Option A + RSV (IESS308/309) INTELSAT Option B + 8PSK + PTCM + RSV(IESS 310) DVB BPSK/QPSK + RSV (DVB-S EN300421) DVB Option D + 8PSK + PTCM-RS (DVB-DSNG EN301210) DVB Option E +16QAM AMT75 DVB-S2 QPSK/8PSK + DVB-S2 EN302307 AMT75 only DVB All modes Option F + Option G Turbo BPSK/QPSK + eTPC Turbo 8PSK Option J + 8PSK Turbo 16QAM Option K +16QAM AMT70 Only Option C + Option F + Option L AMT73L (165A) OQPSK/QPSK/8PSK + PTCM-RS + OM73 AMT70 Only Turbo 16QAM Option F + Option L AMT73L Turbo 16QAM Option N + Option L AMT73L Turbo 8PSK Option N + Option K AMT75 Only 16APSK Option H + 16APSK AMT75 Only 32APSK Option T + 32APSK AMT70 Only Option C + Option F Not Fitted Direct TX Group Delay Equalizer Direct TX + Gr Delay Equalizer OPTION "F" MONITOR & CONTROL OPTIONS ASI + RS530 MD+ 1x HSSI RS-530 + HSSI + Dopp Buff OPTION "C" MODULATION & FEC CODING OPTIONS 5 Option 2 + ASI 1xMD HSSI RS-530 + 3 x HSSI + APOC 1 2 3 4 165A compliant 950 - 2000 MHz, 50 Ω Option 1 + ASI ASI OPTION "S" MAXIMUM DATA RATE OPTIONS 950 - 2150 MHz, 50 Ω 8 * Q 950 - 2150 MHz, 75 Ω 7 0 1 2 3 RS-530 + 1x HSSI MD P Not Fitted 70 / 140MHz, 50 OPTION "Z" AUXILIARY OPTIONS Interface card Not Fitted - (ASI only) N OPTION "D" DEMODULATOR OPTIONS 2 AMT-70 SERIES CONFIGURATOR OPTION "I" DATA INTERFACE OPTIONS * Not for future products. For backward compatibility only 1 Special Requirements B 1 PPS Input to Modulator (Satnet) Not Fitted Redundant 1:1 ASI Redundant 1:1 RS-530 Redundant 1:1 HSSI Redundant 1:12 OPTION "M" MODULATOR OPTIONS 0 F Z X A Laminate with ADV Logo ** For TX Only units 0 A B C D E F G H J K M D C S I P AC without BUC PSU or 10MHz Ext Reference In AC with BUC PSU 24V 4A AC with BUC PSU 48V 2A AC with BUC PSU 48V 4A DC -48V AC without BUC PSU + 10MHz Modem Ext Ref In AC with BUC 24V 4A + 10MHz Modem Ext Ref In AC with BUC 48V 2A + 10MHz modem Ext Ref In AC with BUC 48V 4A + 10MHz Modem Ext Ref In DC -48V + 10MHz Modem Ext Ref In DC -48V with passing through BUC 48V 4A Please Note: The greyed out options have not yet been released from development. Any "Special Requirements" have to be agreed with engineering before quoting DESIGN BY N McSparron DESIGN APPROVAL J Thomson DATE DATE MKT APPROVAL G Matthews DATE QA APPROVAL DATE AMT-70 MODEM SERIES PG 1AR-MDCSIP-FZX REV. 11 p.1 of 1 Figure 2: AMT-70 Family: Products Configuration Options 36 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION 2.1 Introduction This section describes the unpacking, inspection, and installation considerations. 2.2 Unpacking and Inspection Check for damage to the outside and the inside of the shipping container. If there is any damage, contact Customer Service and the shipping carrier to report it. 2.2.1 Unpacking To insure safety and proper operation of this equipment, use the following unpacking and repackaging guidelines: 1. The equipment is shipped in a high-quality cardboard container and packed with high-density molded foam. This type of packing material can withstand impairments such as vibration and impact associated with long-distance shipment. The packing box and foam is the only suitable type of packing that should be used for shipping the equipment. 2. While unpacking, observe how the equipment is packed. In order to avoid damage, it must be repackaged in exactly the same manner if you need to ship the unit to another location or return it to the factory. The packing consists of one large cardboard box, two foam side caps, and one accessory box. Please retain these items for future use. 2.2.2 Inventory Take inventory of the complete package to ensure that all necessary parts are present. A quick review of your pre-installation site survey form, purchase order, and shipping list should reveal any discrepancies. 2.2.3 Site Considerations The installation site should be compatible with the location used for other electronic equipment. That is, the building should be free from excessive dust and moisture. The room should not exceed the recommended temperature range (defined at in TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (AMT70),TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (AMT-73L) or TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (AMT-75) The installation location should allow for ample airflow. Also, allow extra room for service access to cables and wiring. 2.2.4 Installing the unit Move the unit to the location where it will be installed. Ideally, the unit will be installed into an equipment rack or a shelf. If necessary, prior to installation into the rack or shelf, remove the three colored screws on the bottom side of the chassis. The removal of these screws frees up the antivibration mount that was secured during shipping. Install the fan filters onto the external fans, if a regular maintenance schedule can be provided to clean or replace the fans. Do not install the filters at a remote location unless quarterly preventative maintenance is performed. Follow the additional precautions shown below: Do not block the air holes or the fan cut outs the back panel of the unit. These openings must be kept clear for the proper cooling of the equipment. 37 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation Do not place the units beside each other or on top of each other. The exhaust from one unit can be drawn into the air intake of another. Make sure the room is properly cooled. Normal cooling may not be sufficient for locations where the electrical equipment is installed. Always make sure the unit’s top cover is installed and secured in place. If it has not already been done, label each cable that will be attached to the unit. This will prevent confusion and ensures proper connection. 2.3 Power Requirements The AC power version of the modem can accommodate power requirements found worldwide. The DC power of the modems either accepts a plus or minus DC voltage from any 32-72 VDC power source. Please verify that the power system used at the installation site provides a proper earth ground. In addition, verify that the voltage setting matches the voltage and power provided by the facility where it will be installed. 2.3.1 AC Power & Fuse AC power is applied to the modem via socket JP1 (IEC 320 (M)) on the rear panel. NOTE: Only the U.S.-type power cord is shipped with s AMT-70 ist mit einer USA-Schnur nur geliefert. the AMT-70. Because no international power Da es keine internationalen Schnüre mit dem. cords are shipped with the AMT-70, you must AMT-70 gibt, muß man eine zugelassene supply an appropriate approved power cord for Schnur passend für das besondere Land the country of installation. liefern. The fuse assembly is attached to the power receptacle. To remove the fuse, press down on the tab that extends out just below the power receptacle and between the fuse holder. When replacing the fuse, make sure to use the exact type and rating marked next to the fuse holder. AC Fuse: 2.3.2 3.15A 250V (time-delay) DC Power & Fuse DC power is applied to the AMT-70 modem via a barrier strip labeled JP1 on the rear panel. This barrier strip has two screw terminals; one positive (+) and the other negative (-). The two input terminals are floating (neither lead is connected to chassis ground), and therefore can accommodate a +48 VDC source. Do not tie the positive lead from the source to chassis ground. DC Fuse: 6.3A 250V (time-delay) 2.4 Modem Rack/Shelf Support Prior to installing the AMT-70 unit into a rack or shelf, the depth of the supporting structure must be determined. 38 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation Figure 3: Rack Mount Support kit Rear support kits are available to secure the AMT-70 unit firmly on to the supporting structure: 1. Kit (19A-230001-001) for racks with a depth of 600 mm 2. Kit (19A-230011-001) for racks with a depth of 800 mm 3. Kit (19A-230021-001) for racks with a depth of 700 mm Each kit contains two supports, two angles and the associated mounting hardware for the proper installation on the supporting structure. Note: The left and right supports are attached to the AMT-70 unit with two #6-32 x 5/16 inch Phillips countersunk screws. Each angle is attached to a support by one #8-32 x 1/2 inch screw, one # 8 lock washer, one #8 flat washer 3/8 inch outer diameter, one #8 flat washer 1/2 inch outer diameter, and one #8-32 hexagonal nut. 2.5 Data Connections (AMT-70 Series) Data connections for the standard AMT-70 series modems include a RS-530 synchronous data port and a HSSI synchronous data port, a RS-232 and RS-485 asynchronous M&C port, two Ethernet M&C ports, and a status M&C port on the back of the chassis. Optionally there may also be (2) ASI BNC connectors, one for input and one for output. The RS-485 port may be used to manage the BUC and the LNB/BDC. Chapter 8 provides the connector pin-outs for the various interfaces. 39 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation 2.5.1 Data Port RS-530 Receive and transmit data connections are accomplished through the 25-pin D-sub (F) connector labeled TX/RX DATA, RS-530 on the rear panel. In addition to connector pin-outs, Figure 47 provides cable pin-outs that convert the RS-530 interface to an RS-530/449 interface. 2.5.2 Data Port HSSI Receive and transmit data connections are accomplished through the 50-pin SCSI-2 (F) connector labeled HSSI DATA (P3) (J18 on AMT-73L) on the rear panel. Refer to Figure 50 for pin-outs. 2.5.3 Data Port Ethernet Receive and transmit data connections are accomplished through the 8-pin RJ-45 (F) connector labeled 10/100BT DATA (JA on AMT-73L, or ETH0/ETH1 on Dual-IP router equipped modems) on the rear panel. Refer to Figure 51 for pin-outs. 2.5.4 Monitor and Control RS-232 The terminal is connected to the 9-pin D-sub (F) connector labeled M&C/RS-232 (P8) (refer to Figure 52) on the rear panel, via a straight-through cable. 2.5.5 Monitor and Control RS-485 The rear panel 9-pin D-sub (F) connector labeled M&C RS-485 (P7) (refer to Figure 54) is provided for RS-485 compatible M&C of the modem and BUCs that are also equipped. 2.5.6 Monitor and Control 10/100BaseT Ethernet There are two 10/100BaseT Ethernet M&C ports on the rear panel. One is labeled P6, and the other is labeled P1 (both are RJ-45 connectors, see Figure 51 for pin-outs). The P1 connector is used during manufacturing, and relates to the demodulator only, and should not be used in the field. P6 provides Ethernet capabilities for all functions of the modem, including the modulator, demodulator, and interface cards. 2.5.7 Monitor and Control Alarms The connector labeled P5, a 15-pin D-sub (F) provides Form C relay outputs of the modem’s status. Refer to Figure 57 for pinouts and status description. 2.5.8 Redundancy This is an optional feature, although the connector appears on the rear panel (P4, a 15-pin D-sub female). If the modem is so equipped, refer to Chapter 11 for details. A redundancy kit can be purchased from AdvantechAMT to allow two modems to be connected in a 1:1 redundancy configuration. 2.6 Data Connections (AMT-73L Series) The AMT-73L has a different chassis design compared to the AMT-70. Specifically the RS-530 rear panel connector is replaced by an EIA/TIA-449 port although the RS-530 is still available as an option if required, and an External Clock Input has been added. The remaining connectors are the same as for the AMT-70, above, but with different nomenclatures (see Figure 46). 2.6.1 Data Port EIA/TIA-449/MIL-STD-188-114 Receive and transmit data connections are accomplished through the 37-pin D-sub (f) on the rear panel (refer to Figure 55 for pin-outs). 40 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation 2.6.2 External Clock Reference (MIL-STD-188-115) The rear panel includes a BNC connector (J14) for connection to an External 5 MHz Clock. When activated, all frequencies generated within the modem exhibit the same accuracy and stability as this reference. 2.7 RF/IF Interfaces 2.7.1 Modulator L-Band Output (AMT-70L) The L-Band output signal is presented on J6 (Type N female, 50Ω) on the rear panel of the modem. If the modem has been ordered with the BUC power option then the DC voltage is switched onto the inner conductor of this connector. When installing the modem to the system, BUC power should be turned off. The following commands are available via the Command Line Interface for the BUC control. Command Arguments Description BUCPOWER BUC BUCI OFF, ON BUC Power ON/OFF Monitor the BUC voltage used Monitor the BUC current used Figure 4: BUC Control Commands CAUTION: With BUC power enabled, there is a potentially damaging DC voltage applied to the modulator output. When connecting test equipment, or a local modulator (or any DC coupled devices), always use appropriate DC blocks, and disable BUC powering. 2.7.2 Modulator L Band Output (AMT-73L) The L-Band output signal is presented on J1 (Type TNC female, 50Ω) on the rear panel of the modem. There are currently no provisions for providing power to the BUC or SSPB. 2.7.3 Demodulator L Band Input (AMT-70L and 75) The demodulators on all AMT-70L modems are capable of being used in conjunction with most C-band or Ku-band LNBs or BDCs, with L-Band IF frequencies in the range of 950-2150 MHz. For L-Band operation, modem has two separate L-Band inputs and a separate L-Band N-Type output, accessed at the rear of the unit. There are two inputs to demodulator, useful for receiving from two different polarizations or two different satellites. One is on J1 (Type F female, 75 Ω), and the other is on J2 (Type F female, 75 Ω). Either can be connected directly to the Receive IF connector of the appropriate LNB/BDC. The cable loss should be considered when selecting the cable. The demodulator can additionally provide DC power (+13/+18 V, 0.4 A), a 22 kHz tone or a 10 MHz reference on the same cable as the L-Band receive carrier. The ON/OFF state of the LNB power is indicated by an LED on the Front Panel. 41 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation CAUTION: With LNB power enabled, there is a potentially damaging DC voltage applied to the demodulator input. When connecting test equipment, or a local modulator (or any DC coupled devices), always use appropriate DC blocks, and disable LNB powering. The following commands are available to provide DC, tone or reference to the LNB/BDC: Command Arguments Description RLNBP RLNBVP RFREF RLNBTO OFF, ON OFF, ON OFF, ON OFF, ON LNB DC Powering LNB Vertical Polarization LNB 10MHz Reference LNB 22kHz Tone 2.7.4 Demodulator L-Band Input (AMT-73L) The L-Band input signal is presented to J2 (Type TNC female, 50Ω) on the rear panel of the modem. There are currently no provisions for providing LNB/BDC DC power in the AMT-73L. 2.7.5 Demodulator 70/140 MHz IF Input (AMT-70 and AMT-75) The demodulator can optionally be ordered with 70/140MHz inputs, in place of the L-Band inputs. When used in 70MHz input mode, the maximum bandwidth is 36MHz while in the 140MHz mode the full 54MHz or 72MHz range can be used. These inputs are capable of operating with the standard C-, X- or Ku-Band BDC, with their outputs producing 70 MHz on the output. The figure below shows a typical installation using the 70 MHz inputs and the C-, X-, or Ku-Band down converters with 70 MHz outputs. 2.8 Bringing the Modulator Online REFERENCE FREQUENCY STABILITY NOTICE The output frequency of the unit is completely stabilized after approximately 5 minutes after unit power-up. During this warm-up period, it may be desirable to disable the modulator output (use ‘tsignal off’ command, or access via front panel menus; see Chapter 4 for front panel operation). NOTE: Before attempting to bring the modulator on line, the operator should become familiar with the operation of the modem while off line. Refer to Chapter 3 through 6 to obtain a thorough understanding of modem operation using a terminal emulator (or PC with terminal emulation program). When bringing a transmit carrier on line (AMT-70L with BUC power supply), the following sequence must be followed: 42 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation Power on the modem for five minutes to allow the oscillator to stabilize. Before connecting the L-band cable to the BUC, verify that: o The frequency of the modulator and demodulator are correctly set o BUC power is off (bucpower off) o 10 MHz reference is off (tfref off) Set modulator power to -25 dBm (tlevel -25) If required and if the option is fitted, turn on DC power to BUC (bucpower on). If required and if the option is fitted, turn on 10 MHz reference to the BUC (tfref on). Increase modulator output power to desired level (tlevel < desired level >). 43 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation CHAPTER 3 OPERATIONAL FEATURES 3.1 M&C Interface Descriptions The AMT-70/AMT-73L/AMT-75 series modems include 3 different communications methods through 4 different communications paths. These include the following: Front Panel M&C – The modem comes standard with an active front panel that includes a 40 character by 2-line Vacuum Fluorescent Display (VFD) and a 16-button membrane keyboard. It also includes LCD status indicators (7 for the AMT-70, 5 for the AMT-73) for a visual snapshot of modem status. The active front panel is probably the most convenient means of communicating with the modem. The display is in English text with few abbreviations and/or acronyms, and several modem parameters can be entered, displayed, automatically tested, and manually corrected before actually activating those parameters. Parameters that are out-of-range are automatically rejected, and an alert message is displayed to the operator (via English text), who then must manually make the correction before the newly entered parameter(s) are activated. The active front panel is standard for this modem, however, it can be ordered with a passive front panel (price compensated) for modems that will only be remotely controlled. RS-232 M&C Port – The modem comes standard with a rear panel RS-232 asynchronous serial port that is useful for communicating with the modem using a dumb terminal (a terminal that has no processing capabilities), such as a VT-100, or the more popular terminal emulation software, such as HyperTerminal, which is usually included in PC and MAC Windows™ operating software, or Minicom for Linux OS users. Even a PDA (personal digit assistant) with VT100 terminal emulation software (such as Pilot VT100 software) will work. Instructions on how to use the RS-232 and the command list is provided in Chapter 5 and Chapter 6. RS-485 M&C Port – The rear panel RS-485 asynchronous serial port provides the capability to address other AMT-70/AMT-73 modems (or other AdvantechAMT products that include a RS485 port) using a single PC (personal computer) and a single daisy-chained cable connecting all the units. Provisions within the modem provide an address field of 8 binary bits, allowing up to 256 addresses to be assigned. From a single cable in theory up to 32 devices can be connected. However, AdvantechAMT recommends a maximum of 15 devices, which allows the cable to be assembled from ribbon cable. The RS-485 can be set to operate from either a 2-wire where the differential transmit and receive signals share the same pair, or can be set up to operate in 4-wire operation, where the differential transmit and receive signals are on separate lines. The modem is shipped with the 2-wire option, but can be changed by using either the active front panel or the RS-232 port. The RS-485 port can be set to operate in two different modes. One mode is the Command Line Interface mode which is nearly identical to the RS-232 dumb terminal approach, but with addressing capability. Refer to Paragraph 7.2 for more information on how to utilize the CLI 45 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation mode from the RS-485 port. Alternatively, a Packet Protocol mode can be selected. This is recommended for use by programmers in the development of a Network Management System (NMS) or perhaps when the modem is to be used in a bandwidth-on-demand system. The Packet Protocol speeds up the set-up time of a modem or a series of modems. Refer to Paragraph 7.3 for more information regarding Packet Protocol. 10/100BaseT Ethernet Port – There are two 10/100BaseT Ethernet M&C ports on the rear panel. One port (RJ-45), nearest to the power connector (P1 for AMT-70; J10 for AMT-73L) is used during manufacturing purposes only, and is not intended for use in the field. The other port (RJ-45), furthest from the power connector (P6 for AMT-70, J9 for AMT-73L) provides full capabilities to all functions of the modem, with the same instruction set as is available to the RS-232 and RS-485 M&C ports. This port supports SNMP V2 (Simple Network Management Protocol, Version 2) and Telnet. Setup of the network IP address and the subnet mask can be performed from the active front panel (Paragraph 4.2.5.5) or the RS-232 serial M&C port (Paragraph 5.9). Using Telnet in the terminal emulation mode for remote management is described in Paragraph 5.10.3. 3.2 Acquisition, FEC, Modulation, and Eb/No 3.2.1 Demodulator Acquisition Tips This section is a useful checklist for debugging the demodulator acquisition process, with some tips for getting the best performance from the modem. Check the input connection. The L-Band connection must be connected to the correct input and the correct input selected under software control. Input 1 is closest to the Ethernet connector. Check the LNB control signals. DC power (and therefore polarity selection), 22 kHz switching tone and 10MHz reference are switched off by default. Check the L-Band frequency. Check the demodulator configuration. The spectrum sense may be true or inverted. The symbol rate, alpha, modulation and coding must be correctly configured. The frequency acquisition range must be correctly configured – this is described below. Use the “rstatus details” command to verify that the demodulator has acquired2. The frequency acquisition range is dependant on symbol rate, the use of FFT assistance and use of the frequency sweep. As a basic rule without FFT assistance the frequency acquisition range can be assumed to be 2% of symbol rate for QPSK and 1% for 8PSK. If Spectral Analysis (FFT assistance) is enabled – use command rspanl - then the acquisition range for all modulation types can be assumed to be 10% of Symbol rate. For example at 64 kSymbol acquisition would be +/- 7kHz. To increase the acquisition range it is possible to set a frequency sweep using the rsweep (sweep range) and rssize (step size). 2 The front panel LED also indicates if the modulator is locked. 46 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation Therefore, to increase the 64kSymbol acquisition range to +/-30 kHz the rsweep command could be set to 30,000 Hz and the rssize command set to 14kHz. NOTE: It is recommended NOT to use the Spectral Analysis (FFT assisted acquisition) above 3MSymbols. This will significantly slow signal acquisition. RSPANL (the command which enables or disables FFT assistance) is set to auto by default; in this case the FFT is only enabled when the bit rate is less than 1.5Mbps. 3.2.2 Choice of FEC The AMT-70 modem will always support a traditional basic DVB-S (RSV) coding scheme with BPSK and QPSK modulation – either Intelsat IESS-308/9, or DVB-S (or both). Traditionally Intelsat systems have been used for telecommunications data (multiple 64kbps streams and T1/E1 traffic) while DVB-S has been used for MPEG digital video broadcasting. However, DVB systems are increasingly also being used to transmit data both in MPEG format and as raw data. DVB FEC systems always concatenate RS and Viterbi coding whereas the Intelsat systems support RS as an option. Operation without RS can be important when transmitting low-latency services such as voice traffic: removing the RS decoding overhead. With BPSK and QPSK modulation, DVB-S supports ½, 2/3, ¾, 5/6 and 7/8 inner code rates with a RS (204,188) outer code. Intelsat supports ½, ¾ and 7/8 inner code rates with various outer RS code rates including RS (126,112) and RS (219,201). The Intelsat system without RS codes offers a few 100 data bits of latency. With RS coding, an interleaver of depth 4 or 8 can be chosen to trade off latency and performance. The DVB system has approximately 32kbits of latency (code-rate dependent). The modem can transmit RS-530 or HSSI data using either DVB-S or Intelsat. DVB systems outperform (by approximately 1dB) Intelsat systems because they include a better interleaver between the constituent Viterbi and RS codes. The AMT-70 Modem also supports higher order modulation systems, such as 8PSK and 16QAM. These systems are typically used when the link budget permits since, in combination with appropriate FEC, they permit higher spectral efficiency and hence reduce the required satellite bandwidth. 8PSK modulation is currently more popular than 16QAM as it does not require high-linearity amplifiers and transponders. The AMT-70 modulator can be enabled to support IESS-310 8PSK systems (a PTCM 2/3 code, with an RS (219,201) outer code) giving about 2 bits/s/Hz. It can also support DVBDSNG (PTCM 2/3, 5/6 and 8/9 rates, with the RS (204,188) code) and eTPC rates 0.75,0.79, 0.87 and 0.92. Turbo modes are about 1dB better than the roughly equivalent DVB-DSNG systems. The Intelsat system is about 1.5dB inferior to the DVB system, due to differences in the interleaving structure. The AMT-70 Modem also supports 16QAM in two coding modes: DVB-DSNG and eTPC. DVB-DSNG 16QAM supports ¾ and 7/8 rates with the RS (204,188) outer code. 16QAM with eTPC can usefully operate in 4 rates: 0.75, 0.78, 0.87 and 0.92. Important Note: The DVB system can be configured to transmit both MPEG-2 and non MPEG-2 data. When using DVB modes to transmit non MPEG-2 data it is necessary to turn DVB REMOVE MARK ON in the demodulator (command RRMVMK ON). This is required, since DVB FEC utilizes the MPEG framing structure, which must therefore be imposed by the modulator (and similarly removed by the 47 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation demodulator). There is a performance overhead associated with the sync byte, but it is only 0.5% of data rate. 48 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation Mode Intelsat 308/309 Modulation BPSK, QPSK OQPSKI / OQPSKQ Intelsat 310 8PSK DVB-S QPSK OQPSKI / OQPSKQ 8PSK and 16QAM DVB-DSNG DVB-S2S QPSK, 8PSK, 16APSK, 32APSK QPSK, 8PSK, 16APSK, 32APSK DVB-S2N TPC4K PSK,QPSK, oQPSK, 8PSK and 16QAM TPC16K BPSK,QPSK, oQPSK, 8PSK and 16QAM BPSK, oQPSK and QPSK and NONE OM73 Rates Rates: ½, ¾ and 7/8 are valid along with the option of Reed-Solomon OFF/ 219 or 126 Rates: 2/3 and again with the option of Reed-Solomon OFF/ 219 or 126 Rates: ½, 2/3, ¾, 5/6 and 7/8 Rates 2/3, 5/6 8/9 in 8PSK and ¾ and 7/8 in 16QAM. Rates ¼, 1/2. 3/5 2/3, ¾, 4/5, 5/6, 8/9 Rates 1/2. 3/5 2/3, ¾, 4/5, 5/6, 8/9, 9/10, 1/4 Rate 4/5 and 3/4 Rate 2/5, 3/5, 8/9, 7/8 and 19/20. NONE, 1/2 and 3/4 Figure 5: FEC / MODE / RATE Configuration Chart 3.2.3 Pilots Insertion To aid carrier recovery and a physical layer framing synchronization, the DVB-S2 standards proposes optional insertion of pilot symbols. The system provides a regular physical layer framing structure, based on SLOTs of M = 90 modulated symbols, allowing reliable receiver synchronization on the FEC block structure. A slot is devoted to physical layer signaling, including Start-of-Frame delimitation and transmission mode definition. This mechanism is suitable also for VCM and ACM demodulator setting. Carrier recovery in the receivers may be facilitated by the introduction of a regular raster of pilot symbols (P = 36 pilot symbols every 16 SLOTs of 90 symbols), while a pilot-less transmission mode is also available, offering an additional 2,4 % useful capacity. The pilot presence/absence in VCM and ACM can be changed on a frame-by-frame basis. With the receiver algorithms taken into consideration, carrier synchronization can be achieved in presence of phase noise of existing outdoor equipment, including the LNB and worst-case thermal noise for any DVB-S2 mode. Some of the transmission modes, such as for example 8PSK rate 3/5 and rate 2/3, 16APSK rate 3/4 and 32APSK 4/5 required the use of pilot symbols to avoid cycle slips. For ACM operation, the use of pilot symbols can guarantee continuous receiver synchronization. 3.2.4 Equalizer Note: The equaliser will only operate in DVB-S2 modes. Pilot symbols must also be enabled. 49 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation The user should employ the least number of equaliser taps to satisfactorily correct for the linear distortions present in the communication channel. Using more taps than necessary can have adverse effects. The number of taps activated must be between 6 and 32 (inclusive), and must be even. The number of equaliser taps required is programmed as follows: >req 20 req = 20 >rreset rreset = OK All 32 equaliser taps may be used up to a symbol rate of 18712574 baud. Above this symbol rate, the maximum number of taps that can be selected is limited by the unit. Up to 12 taps may be used at the maximum demod symbol rate of 45Mbaud. If the maximum number of permissible taps is exceeded, a warning is issued when the demod is reconfigured (baud rate is 27.5Mbaud in the example below): >req 22 req = 22 >rreset rreset Equalizer too long for baud-rate N-taps 32 30 28 26 24 22 20 18 16 14 <=12 Max Baudrate (Mbaud) 18.71 19.96 21.39 23.03 24.95 27.22 29.94 33.27 37.43 42.77 45.00 3.2.5 Link Budget Analysis and Eb/No (Viterbi and Viterbi R/S) There are many satellites available that operate in C or Ku Bands with different transmission parameters (power, bandwidth, sensitivity, etc.); different tariffs for their use; different operational requirements and under different regulatory environments. The link budget problem normally consists of determining the optimum economic solution for the particular network requirements, given the satellite parameters, the price for utilization of power and bandwidth and the operational restrictions that may apply. The link budget should always guarantee a minimum Eb/N0 for worst-case conditions, as a function of the availability requirements of the network, typically resulting in a BER of 10-7. The figure on the next page illustrates the minimum Eb/N0 required for different bit rates and code rates 50 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation for Intelsat Viterbi with and without Reed Solomon and the DVB-S and DVB-DSNG formatted Viterbi with RS. Onto this value must be added link margin; this includes rain margin, pointing loss, etc. For example, if a -3 dB rain margin is added, the link will normally be operating at better than 10-10 BER under clear sky conditions. The figure also shows examples of the allocated bandwidth (or channel spacing) for each of the carrier types. Out-of-beam emission limits or downlink emission limits as defined by the regulatory environment in the country where the network is being installed are also an issue: there may be a limit on the minimum or maximum antenna size to be used. 51 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation Figure 6: Allocated Bandwidth and Eb/No for Viterbi and Viterbi + Reed Solomon Transmission Method Viterbi & Viterbi R/S Channel Spacing (Rounded) Eb/N0 @ 10-07 (Typical) dB INTELSAT SYSTEM Viterbi Viterbi + R/S Viterbi Viterbi + R/S 2048 kbps, QPSK, rate 1/2 2870 kHz 3025 kHz 6.5 4.4 2048 kbps, QPSK, rate 3/4 1915 kHz 2085 kHz 7.8 5.9 2048 kbps, QPSK, rate 7/8 1640 kHz 1785 kHz 9.0 6.9 256 kbps, QPSK, rate 1/2 360 kHz 390 kHz 6.5 4.4 256 kbps, QPSK, rate 3/4 240 kHz 260 kHz 7.8 5.9 256 kbps, QPSK, rate 7/8 205 kHz 225 kHz 9.0 6.9 128 kbps, QPSK, rate 1/2 180 kHz 195 kHz 6.5 4.4 128 kbps, QPSK, rate 3/4 120 kHz 130 kHz 7.8 5.9 128 kbps, QPSK, rate 7/8 105 kHz 115 kHz 9.0 6.9 128 kbps, BPSK, rate 1/2 360 kHz 390 kHz 6.5 4.4 64 kbps, QPSK, rate 1/2 90 kHz 100 kHz 6.5 4.4 64 kbps, QPSK, rate 3/4 60 kHz 65 kHz 7.8 5.9 64 kbps, QPSK, rate 7/8 55 kHz 60 kHz 9.0 6.9 64 kbps, BPSK, rate 1/2 180 kHz 180 kHz 6.5 4.4 32 kbps, QPSK, rate 1/2 45 kHz 50 kHz 6.5 4.4 32 kbps, QPSK, rate 3/4 25 kHz 30 kHz 7.8 5.9 32 kbps, BPSK, rate 1/2 90 kHz 100 kHz 6.5 4.4 DVB SYSTEM Viterbi with RS (204,188) Eb/N0 @ 10-11 BER (Quasi Error Free) dB Actual Code Rate Channel Spacing DVB-S 20 Mbps, QPSK, Rate 1/2 0.46 30.4 MHz 4.1 DVB-S 20 Mbps, QPSK, Rate 2/3 0.61 23.0 MHz 4.6 DVB-S 20 Mbps, QPSK, Rate 3/4 0.69 20.3 MHz 5.1 DVB-S 20 Mbps, QPSK, Rate 5/6 0.77 18.2 MHz 5.6 DVB-S 20 Mbps, QPSK, Rate 7/8 0.81 17.3 MHz 6.0 DVB-DSNG 40 Mbps, 8PSK, Rate 2/3 0.614 30.4 MHz 6.5 DVB-DSNG 40 Mbps, 8PSK, Rate 5/6 0.77 24.2 MHz 7.9 DVB-DSNG 40 Mbps, 8PSK, Rate 8/9 0.82 22.8 MHz 8.4 DVB-DSNG 60 Mbps, 16QAM, Rate 3/4 0.69 30.4 MHz 8.6 DVB-DSNG 60 Mbps, 16QAM, Rate 7/8 0.81 25.9 MHz 10.3 3.3 Modem Applications and Typical Operating Scenarios The AMT-70 modem series supports a wide variety of coding schemes and data interfaces allowing its use in a variety of applications. An overview of some of the common applications and modes are outlined in this section of the manual. The AMT-73 is primarily designed to operate in the SCPC mode, although it can be optioned to operate as a DVB Modulator or Data Broadcast Modulator as well. 3.3.1 DVB (MPEG-2) Modulator The AMT-70 can be configured as a DVB Modulator carrying MPEG-2 traffic. The specific model number for the modulator-only product is AMT70 (TX only) for DVB-S or DVB-DSNG and AMT-75 for a 52 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation unit supporting DVB-S, DVB-DSNG and DVB-S2 SHORT and NORMAL blocks. In this configuration, the ASI input is used to receive MPEG-2 data for onward transmission. It is possible to include a Demodulator in the same 1RU unit. This can be used to monitor the Modulator output and it outputs an ASI stream. There are two generally supplied configurations for this mode of operation – redundant and nonredundant. Redundancy support may be provided without the need for an external controller. 3.3.2 Data Broadcast Modulator Traditionally DVB modulators have been used in conjunction with MPEG-2 data encapsulators to provide a high-speed data distribution forward link into a star-network. The return link is then typically achieved using SCPC modulators such as the AdvantechAMT-10 or via terrestrial modems. The AMT70 can be operated in this mode if required: typically for these systems, taking input from ASI. However, it is also possible to directly connect the Modulator to the output of an IP router using the HSSI interface. The modulator can still operate in a DVB mode – the user selects the DVB FEC / Modulation mode they desire and unframed data. The Modulator then inserts the required DVB sync marks into the data stream and transmits it. At the remote station, the user has several solutions available to receive the data stream including the AdvantechAMT SBR-70 single board receiver or third party receivers. TCP/IP data can be encapsulated in frame relay format in the Router. This mode of operation can save significant money in the head-end, as DVB IP encapsulation is no longer required. The use of eTPC can also significantly reduce the satellite bandwidth cost over the lifetime of the system. The AMT70 can also be order with an inbuilt IP router removing the need for expensive external data encapsulator units. 3.3.3 SCPC Modem AMT-70 supports traditional SCPC modem applications, offering a wide choice of data-rate from 64kbps to 52Mbps on the RS-530 and HSSI data ports and from 256 kbps to 140 Mbps on the ASI data port. Current options include 10/100 Base-T Ethernet and Triple HSSI. Future options for the data ports will include multiple E1, T1, E3, DS-3. Many features of the modem can be upgraded as required in the field allowing the product capability to grow as your traffic and revenue increases. 3.3.4 Bandwidth-On-Demand Modem The AMT-70 can be operated in a Bandwidth-On-Demand (BOD) mode with the appropriate network software, and the use a separate control channel for setting up the link. This control channel could be a separate channel over the satellite, a dial-up RS-232 or RS-485 modem, or the more popular Internet whereby the 10/100BaseT M&C port is connected to a low-speed dial-up Ethernet modem or a highspeed cable, DSL (digital subscriber line), or ISDN (integrated services digital network) line. The use of a router in this latter choice allows other modems at that earth station location to be addressed from a single Internet connection. 3.3.5 Broadcast Mode The AMT-70 series modem is well equipped to operate in a broadcast mode whereby a single outbound carrier can be transmitted to a series of receive sites. A companion demodulator, called our SBR-70, installed at each of these receive sites, which have the same wideband data capability with Viterbi and Viterbi Reed Solomon, can then be set to receive these broadcast signals in either the DVB-S, DVB-DSNG, or Intelsat formats. Equipped with the optional eTPC turbo cards, the modulator and demodulator can be used in a proprietary and powerful FEC algorithm. 3.4 Default, Memory Store and Recall Modes The modem incorporates a default option that sets the modem to a known set of known parameters preset at the factory. Additionally the modem includes 10 memory store and recall modes that can be preset by the customer for instant recall and activation, similar to that of a pushbutton radio. 53 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation An example of the latter’s use would be for a simple BOD system, where there have been up to 10 satellite channels set aside for communication with as many as perhaps 100 remote terminals. Each remote modem would have previously been preset to those channels, and merely recalling and activating the memory location of an inactive satellite channel places that site (or modem) online. 3.4.1 The default configuration The default configuration file is static file template defined to configure the modem in a well-known operational state. If two modems are configured back-to-back in default mode they should communicate with each other after the default command is run. 1. The CLI “default” command can be used 2. On the front-panel the FUNC/CONFIG/DEFAULT load this configuration FUNC: DEFAULT LOAD.CFG SAVE.CFG You must note that the default file is static and cannot be changed by the modem operator. The DEFAULT parameters are as follows: Figure 6: AMT70 Modem Default Parameters Modulator Parameters Data Rate Units Data Rate Modulation Code Type Code Rate RS Rate Diff Encoder Scrambler Carrier Freq Spectrum Invert Filter Alpha Transmit Level Tx Signal IF Loopback Tx Output Band Tx Data Input BER Test Pattern RS Interleaver CW Carrier Tx Reset BPS 5,000,000 QPSK INTELSAT 1/2 off ON ON 1,000,000,000 NORMAL 0.35 -25 on OFF Lband INTERNAL_PRBS 2_23 depth4 off Demodulator Parameters Data Rate Units Data Rate Demodulation Code Type Code Rate RS Rate Diff Decoder Descrambler Carrier Freq Spectrum Invert Filter Alpha FFT Spectrum Anal Sweep Range Sweep Step Size Rx Input LNB Power LNB Tone Status LNB 10 MHz Ref Raw Data via MPEG RS Interleaver Rx Offset Rx Clock Option D/C Mute Mode3 BPS 5,000,000 QPSK INTELSAT 1/2 off ON ON 1,000,000,000 auto 0.35 AUTO 250,000 50,000 input1 OFF OFF OFF off depth4 0 ext off Interface Parameters Interface Type Transmit Clock Receive Clock Loopback Mode Tx Clock Inversion Rx Clock Inversion Doppler Buffer Mode Tx Data Inversion Rx Data Inversion rs530 internal local off off off auto off off Rx Reset 3 Available only on AMT-73 modem 54 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation NOTE: When the default command is executed the last modem parameters entered are also reset. DEFAULT should not be executed while the modem is online, since it may disrupt other traffic users operating from the same satellite. It is primarily to be used for bench testing, ONLY. 3.4.2 Programmable Memory Configurations The programmable memory configurations are specific user configurations defined and saved by the modem operator. They are kept in a command list file on flash. Up to 10 configuration files can be saved / restored. There are two ways to manage these configurations: 1. In CLI mode loadcfg savecfg listcfg 2. From the Front-Panel FUNC / CONFIG DEFAULT LOAD.CFG SAVE.CFG The way to create a configuration file is as follows; 1. You can change some modem values in the CLI command mode and/or from the front panel selections for your specific configuration. 2. When it’s time to save your specific configuration, use the command line ‘savecfg [n]” where n=0 to 9. You can also use the option SAVE.CFG from the front-panel and select the configuration number you want to save using the numeric keypad. The way the firmware creates the “saved file” is by querying all the modem cards for the active setup and writing these values on flash. Finally, you load/reload a configuration “saved” using the LOAD.CFG option. You must note that this configuration becomes the “active setup” only when the TRESET / RRESET commands are explicitly NOTE: It is recommended that one of these locations be used to store the most current operational characteristics after the modem is placed online and becomes operational. This would allow for a quick retrieval of the last known good parameters in the event a parameter change is made, whether invoked manually, by some software glitch, power failure, or the like. used. 55 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation 3.5 Clock Options and Buffers – Standard Interface Card The AMT-70 and AMT-73L includes many clocking options that can be selected to satisfy a multitude of satellite conditions. The standard AMT-70 modulator includes three different options, and the standard AMT-73L includes five different options. Both the standard AMT-70 demodulator and the standard AMT-73L have four different options. Figure 7 is a simplified block diagram of the modem that shows the clocking options. DATAIN SD TX Jitter Buffer SerialData TXReed Solomon WriteClock Viterbi Encoder Encoder& Scrambler Write Clock TT ST RS-530 or HSSI Interface Internal Timing RD NearEnd Interface Loopback Framer/ Deframer/IBS Scrambler/ Descrambler ST RT DATAOUT EXTCLK TT RX Doppler Buffer Demod Clock DemodD Modulator& IF IFOUTPUT Turbo Encoder NearEnd Internal Loopback IF Loopback FarEnd Internal Loopback Turbo Decoder Encoder& Scrambler RXReed Solomon IF& Demodulator IFINPUT Viterbi Decoder FarEnd Interface Loopback Figure 7: Functional Block Diagram of AMT-70/73L modem The terminology used herein is based on the RS-530/422 mnemonics, which includes such abbreviations as TT for Terminal Timing, ST for Send Timing, RT for Receive Timing, SD for Send Data, and RD for Receive Data. The modem is always a DCE (Data Communications Equipment, which normally supplies the clock to the DTE (Data Terminal Equipment). Crossover cables for interfacing to equipment that supports only the DCE interface is provided in Chapter 8. The modulator incorporates a transmit de-jitter buffer that reduces the amount of jitter from the DTE terminal. It is always in the transmit path, and has a fixed size. This size is varied depending on the FEC system. A command (TXJTRST) allows the variation of the de-jitter buffer to be measured. The demodulator incorporates a Doppler Buffer that can be bypassed or activated. The Doppler Buffer length is operator programmable for length and is automatically centered. The lowest limit is 32 bytes and the maximum upper limit is 65536 bytes (approx 0.5Mbits). Length is related to data rate; the lower the data rate, the smaller the buffer. The Doppler Buffer can also be used as a Plesiochronous Buffer, where the near end modem and far end modem are operating with dissimilar (but accurate) clocks. Using the buffer in this fashion, clock 56 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation slips occur and should be expected. When used as a Plesiochronous Buffer, the size of the buffer should be greater than if it is being used as a Doppler Buffer to reduce the periodic clock slip occurrences. NOTE: The length of the buffer is related to latency and data rate. It may not be appropriate, for example, to choose a buffer length of 64 kbits if the data rate is 64 kbps, unless a latency of 1 second is acceptable. The Doppler buffer can be occasionally centered by invoking the IFBUFRESET command. THIS COMMAND MAY CAUSE A MOMENTARY DISRUPTION OF MODEM TRAFFIC. The flexibility of the AMT-70/73 clocking provides the following options: TRANSMIT CLOCK OPTIONS • Transmit Internal Clock (SCT) – This is the normal operation, where the modem provides ST to the DTE device, and the DTE provides TT in return (not always). • External Mode (Transmit Terrestrial Clock) (SCTE) – In this mode the DTE provides the transmit clock, and the modem synchronizes to that clock. • RX Loop-Timing (SCR) – When selected the modem synchronizes its transmit clock with the clock it receives from the demodulator. This avoids the possibility of clock slips of dissimilar clocks (near end/far end). • RS530TFD – This option using clock recovery is used when the DTE does not return TT, and therefore the modem has to recreate the modem’s internal transmit clock from the data. This is standard for the AMT-73L modem. It only operates on RS530/EIA449 data. RECEIVE CLOCK OPTIONS • Doppler Buffer Mode – This Doppler buffer can be switched between AUTO mode and Manual Mode. In AUTO mode the buffer selects what is considered a reasonable delay. In Manual mode the user can specify a buffer length between 32 and 65536 bytes. To effectively disable the buffer select RX Timing to DEMOD, select Manual mode for the buffer and enter a 32byte delay. NOTE after every demodulator reconfigure (RRESET command) the IFBUFRESET command should be issued to reset the Doppler buffer fill level to mid-point. • Buffer Enabled, LOCAL, (SCT) Synced to Internal TX ST Clock – In this mode, the buffer is enabled, the data from the demodulator is clocked into the buffer by the Demod Clock, but is clocked out by the ST clock. • Buffer Enabled, DTE_TT, (SCTE) Synced to External TT Clock – In this case the TT clock is used to transmit the data out of the Doppler Buffer. • Buffer Enabled, DEMOD, (SCR) Synced to Demodulator derived Reference – In this mode the demodulator clock is de-jittered to remove high frequency jitter before clocking out of the Doppler buffer. Low frequency jitter will not be filtered. 57 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation 3.5.1 Transmit Timing Data can be clocked into and out of the transmit de-jitter buffer via the four clocking modes described below: 3.5.1.1 Internal Clock (SCT) The modem supplies the clock to the DTE device, which uses that clock to transmit the data out of its buffer. The modem issues ST to the DTE, and the DTE device returns TT to the modem. In some cases, the DTE does not return TT, which is acceptable for low data rates, but for higher data rates, AdvantechAMT cannot guarantee clock/data relationships due to delays induced by varying cable lengths. This mode is entered by selecting IFTXCLOCK internal (SCT). 3.5.1.2 External (Terrestrial) Clock (SCTE) The DTE device supplies the clock to the modem (TT), which uses its internal clock to transmit the data out of its buffer. The modem uses the TT clock to 1) clock the SD into the jitter buffer, and 2) synchronize its internal modem clock. The internal modem clock, which is smoothed, clocks the data out of the jitter buffer, which removes the short-term jitter that may appear on the incoming data. This mode is entered by selecting IFTXCLOCK external (SCTE). 3.5.1.3 Loop Timing (SCR) The modem’s Demod Clock supplies the clock to the DTE device, which uses that clock to transmit the data out of its buffer. The modem issues ST to the DTE, and the DTE device returns TT to the modem. In some cases, the DTE does not return TT, which is acceptable for low data rates, but for higher data rates, AdvantechAMT cannot guarantee clock/data relationships due to delays induced by varying cable lengths. This mode is useful when the far end modem has to provide a clock to the DTE equipment, which is now synchronized to the clock from the near end modem. This mode is entered by selecting IFTXCLOCK rxloop (SCR). 3.5.1.4 RS530TFD Clock Recovery This special feature is standard with the AMT-73L modem. It is a requirement that the modem extract the internal clock from the incoming data in the absence of TT per MIL-STD-188-165A. This operates on the RS530/EIA449 data interface. This mode is entered by selecting IFTXCLOCK rs530tfd. 3.5.2 Receive Timing Data can be clocked into and out of the Doppler Buffer via the four clocking modes described below: 3.5.2.1 Doppler Buffer Auto In this mode the Modem automatically selects what is considered to be an appropriate fill level (delay) for the Doppler buffer. This mode can be used with any of the RX Timing modes. Note: If IFRXCLOCK is set to ‘demod (SCR)’ then the Doppler buffer should be configured to Manual mode with a low fill level (32 to 100bytes) to minimize latency. 58 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation 3.5.2.2 Doppler Buffer Enabled – Internal ST Clocking (SCT) The internally generated transmit clock (ST) is used to clock the data out of the Doppler Buffer. A complex scheme allows the Doppler buffer to start from the center, then as the Demod Clock varies due to the diurnal of the satellite movement, it will vary + and - around center to maintain the bit integrity of the output data (RD) without any Doppler shift.This mode is entered by selecting IFRXCLOCK local (SCT). 3.5.2.3 Doppler Buffer Enabled – External TT Clocking (SCTE) The externally generated transmit clock (TT) is used to clock the data out of the Doppler Buffer. A complex scheme allows the Doppler buffer to start from the center, then as the Demod Clock varies due to the diurnal of the satellite movement, it will vary + and - around center to maintain the bit integrity of the output data (RD) without any Doppler shift. This mode is entered by selecting IFRXCLOCK DTE TT (SCTE). 3.6 Loop-back, Pure Carrier, and BER Test Functions Warning: Invoking any of the loopback, Pure Carrier, and BER test functions will cause the modem to disrupt normal traffic through the modem. These tests should only be performed with the modem placed offline. The AMT-70 and AMT-73L includes three built-in loop-back functions that allow maintenance functions to be performed on the modem and external circuitry. There are two data loop-back functions and one IF loop-back function. Activating the either of the two data loop-back functions (either/or) invokes a near end or a far end loop-back. The IF loop-back is only a local (near end) loop-back. Loop-backs are a keen method of isolating a problem to a particular area. Both modems support the activation of a pure carrier, which allows offline testing of the modulator output, such as phase noise, frequency accuracy. Caution should be taken in the activation of a pure carrier node, since it places all of the energy into a single frequency. This may cause interference problems with others sharing the satellite transponder. The AMT-70 and AMT-73L include a built-in BER generator and tester that allow a maintenance operator to thoroughly test modem before placing it on line. While in this mode, the modem is effectively off line, since the modulator will produce a test pattern polynomial, and, to be effective, the demodulator will test that test pattern with one of its stored polynomials. 3.6.1 Data Interface Near End/Far End Loop-back The data interface loop-back is directly at the input of the interface. When activated, the near end Interface loop-back returns the transmit data (TD) and clock (TT) directly to the receive data (RD) and receive clock (RT) without going through any active components. The far end loop-back (both are activated simultaneously) sends RD and RT to TD and TT, respectively. Testing at the far end modem 59 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation therefore tests both modems completely.Thee near end mode is entered by selecting IFLOOPMODE The far end mode is entered by selecting IFLOOPMODE line far. line local. 60 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation 3.6.2 Data System Near End/Far End Loop-back A data system internal loop-back is in between the framer (if so equipped) and the FEC encoder/decoder. Activation of the near end internal loop-back therefore tests the interface card (clocking and framer) of the local modem, and testing from the far end checks the modulator and demodulator (including FEC, scrambler, and differential coder) of the distant end modem, plus the entire modem at the testing end. The near end mode is entered by selecting IFLOOPMODE system local. The far end mode is entered by selecting IFLOOPMODE system far. 3.6.3 IF Loop-back Data can be clocked into and out of the Doppler Buffer via the four clocking modes described below: This mode is entered by selecting TLOOPBACK on, and then selecting RINPUT loopback. 3.6.4 Pure Carrier Mode A pure carrier can be generated which allows testing of the modulator without modulated data. Care is needed before using this mode since this could cause interference with other traffic on the same satellite transponder. If the modulator is configured and operating in any mode, then select TCWT on. The CW power is equivalent to the normal modulated power. 3.6.5 Internal BER Test Pattern Generator and Tester The AMT-70/73L provides the means of testing the modulator and the demodulator circuitry. By activating one of 10 test patterns (5 non-inverted; 5 inverted) from the modulator, a demodulator equipped with a like BER tester (or a BER tester itself) can test the link integrity and obtain a reasonable Eb/No and BER of the satellite link – assuming that the demodulator is on the other end of a satellite link. Or it can be used to test a new modem prior to putting it online. The test pattern polynomials generated by the modulator are standard BER test patterns provided by most BER testers. Note that the AMT70/73L demodulator has a built-in true BERT measurement function. This ONLY operates on 2_23 true PRBS mode and the measured BER can be viewed using the RX>MONITOR>BERT display on the front panel. The BERT statistics can be reset using the TEST menu> FAULT.RST function. • Example 1: Set the far end modulator of an AMT-70/73L to one of the test patterns, then set the near end AMT-70/73L demodulator to the same test pattern. By observing RSNR, or REBNO, and or REBER (estimated BER), a fairly accurate link performance can be obtained. Raising or lowering the TLEVEL at the sending end will increase/decrease Eb/No readings. RBER can also be used if the polynomial pattern is PRBS 2_23. Both the modulator and demodulator need to be on the same frequency, data rate, FEC type, FEC code rate, etc. Both ends of the link can be tested merely by switching the transmitting source and the receiving end. 61 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation • Example 2: A local test with noise would be to receive a downlink feed, mix it through a power divider with the modulator output, then feed the mixed output from the power divider to the demodulator desiring to be tested. This test assumes that the modulator is off line. Place the modulator frequency within an area that is supporting no carriers. An inline pad may be necessary if the TX carrier is too high in level. The desirable level is where the modulated carrier is approximately level with the received carriers off the satellite. Use the S/N + N values from Chapter 13B to obtain conversion to Eb/No values. This mode is entered by selecting TPRBS and selecting the modulator test pattern 2_23. Once the modulator and demodulator is configured and passing data, accurate BER, raw BER, Eb/No and SNR values can be taken by observing RBER, REBER, REBNO and RSNR results. 3.6.6 BER Measurement Note that the AMT70 and AMT73L provides two means of analyzing link error rate performance When the Modulator is operating with INTERNAL_PRBS of 2^15-1 then the front panel menu MONITOR>RX>BER shows the real Bit Error Rate measured from errors detected on the PRBS sequence. The BER can be reset by selecting FUNC>TEST>RESET>RX.STATS. This measure can be accessed via the CLI command RBER. NOTE: THIS VALUE IS MEANINGLESS WHEN THE MODEM IS RECEIVING REAL DATA TRAFFIC. There is also an Estimated BER, which is useful when the modem is operating with real data. This is displayed on the front panel MONITOR>RX>EST.BER. This can be accessed from the CLI using the command REBER. 3.7 ASI Interfaces The AMT70 supports two main ASI input modes of operation selected via the TX>INPUT field: • • MPEG_VIA_ASI VBR_MPEG_ASI MPEG_VIA_ASI does NOT change the incoming DVB MPEG ASI stream. Therefore the Modulator symbol rate / bit rate must be configured to match the incoming bit rate otherwise the Input buffer will overflow or underflow. The Modulator can operate with an incoming bit-rate up to +/- 200ppm tolerance. VBR_MPEG_ASI does allow the modulator to insert DVB NULL packets into the incoming MPEG-2 data stream. The modulator corrects any PCR values in the stream to compensate for the insertion of null packets. In this mode the incoming data stream must never exceed the bit-rate set on the Modulator. 62 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation CHAPTER 4 ACTIVE FRONT PANEL It is recommended that Chapter 3 be reviewed to understand the operational features of this modem prior to setting up the modem. 4.1 Quick Start Guide Modems equipped with the active front panel (LCD display and keypad) provide an easy way to quickly setup a modem and place it online without any connection to a PC or generic control system. This paragraph is intended to provide a guide for maintenance personnel to quickly setup the modem using the active front panel. Two scenarios are considered; the first one is for bench testing of the modem, and the other is for actually setting up the modem and placing it online. 4.1.1 Bench Test Setup Assuming the modem has just been powered up, perform the following steps: A WELCOME menu (Paragraph 4.2.3) appears. Hit any key, and the MAIN MENU (Paragraph 4.2.4) appears. Arrow over to FUNC (Paragraph 4.2.5.5), hit ENT (for enter), then arrow over to CONFIG, and hit ENT again. In the CONFIG sub-menu, arrow over to DEFAULT, and hit ENT twice. This places the Modulator and Demodulator into a factory DEFAULT configuration, which is 5 Mbps, ½ rate QPSK, Intelsat Viterbi, no Reed Solomon, Modulator in BER Test mode with a 223 test pattern, and the Tx and Rx frequencies set to 1 GHz. And most importantly, it sets the Tx power output to -25 dBm, which is the lowest calibrated power output from the modem. Now, with an IF coaxial cable (L band) connected through an inline pad (the Tx output has a range of 0 to -25 dBm, the Rx input has a range of -35 to -55 dBm, depending on data rate), the modem could be fully tested using the built-in BER demodulator tester. See A.2.7 for the AMT-70L modem, or for the AMT-73L, or check the Specifications in TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (AMT-70) or TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (AMT-73L) for actual demodulator power input ranges. Remember that there is an impedance mismatch between the Tx output (50 Ω) and the Rx input (75 Ω). Figure 8 provides a suggested loop-back cable assembly that would be appropriate for interconnecting the Tx output to (one of) the Rx input(s). All of these items are readily available from specialized electronic stores, or can be purchased from AdvantechAMT. Figure 8: AMT-70L or AMT-73L Loopback Cable Assembly N (m ) to N (m ) Cable Assy. 50 Ohms N (f) to F (m ) DC Block From Tx Output N (f) to F (f) Im pedance Match Adaptor F (m ) to F (f) 10-30 dB Attenuator F (m ) to F (m ) Cable Assy. 75 Ohms T in 63 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation If these loop-back components are not readily available, you could use the internal IF loop-back mode of the modem. To activate the internal IF loop-back mode, perform the following: From the MAIN MENU, arrow to TEST, hit ENT. With the M of MODE flashing, hit ENT Arrow to LOOPBACK, select ON, and hit ENT. From the MAIN MENU, arrow to RX, hit ENT. Arrow down to INPUT, hit ENT. Select LOOPBACK and hit ENT This is an absolute BER test capability that provides accurate results. To review the results, perform the following: From the MAIN MENU (if in a different menu, hit CLR once or twice to get back to the MAIN MENU), arrow over to MONITOR and hit ENT. Arrow over to RX and hit ENT. Arrow down several times until BER appears in the upper left corner of the display. It will display unlocked while the modem is acquiring the signal. It may be necessary to raise the power output to get the modem to acquire. To do this, perform the following steps: From the MAIN MENU, arrow over to TX and hit ENT. Hit ENT when the T in TX flashes. Arrow down (twice) until POWER = -xx dBm appears (xx should actually be -25 at this time). Arrow over until the P in POWER is flashing. Hit ENT. Change the power output by arrowing over to each value and then use the keypad to enter the number. When the number is correct, hit ENT, and the new value entered will be executed. Once the demodulator locks up, the BER readout will display the actual number of accumulated errors. (You must be in MONITOR MAIN MENU and BER, as above.) Other estimated values, such as SNR, Eb/No, baud (symbol) rate, AGC (labeled POWER.AGC) can be observed during this BER testing by arrowing up or down while in the MONITOR menu. If a different data rate, code rate, FEC type, or modulation scheme is desired, use the information from Figure 6 to change those parameters: Figure 9: Parameter Changes in Test Mode TX Main Menu PARAMETER MOD UNITS CARR FRQ DATA CODE RATE RSRATE RX Main Menu CURRENT VALUE DESIRED VALUE QPSK BPS 1000000000Hz 005000000BPS INTELSAT ½ OFF 16QAM BPS 0950000000Hz 2048000BPS TPC16K 8/9 OFF PARAMETER DEMOD UNITS CARR FRQ DATA CODE RATE RSRATE CURRENT VALUE QPSK BPS 1000000000Hz 005000000BPS INTELSAT 1/2 OFF DESIRED VALUE 16QAM BPS 0950000000Hz 2048000BPS TPC16K 8/9 OFF ENTER the changed values from the TX and RX menus, then page down to RECONFIGURE = READY, press enter and then enter again to CONFIRM. 64 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation This example will change the 5 Mbps data rate to 2.048 Mbps, the FEC to eTPC (Turbo) with a 8/9 code rate. The Tx and Rx frequencies also change from 1 GHz to 950 MHz. NOTE: When completed with the bench testing, remember that the Modulator is in the BER test mode. To return the Modulator to an operational status (passing external data), go to TX (MAIN MENU), hit ENT, arrow down to INPUT, hit ENT, arrow to EXTERNAL or required ASI mode, and hit ENT again. Follow this with TX RECONFIGURE and hit ENT twice. 4.1.2 Placing Modem Online Before placing a modem online, it is important to turn off the transmit carrier and perhaps the DC voltages and 10 MHz Reference to the BUC and LNB. These are found in menus TX – SGN OFF, FUNC – CONTROL – BUC - REF OFF, FUNC – CONTROL – LNB –LNBPWR OFF, and FUNC – CONTROL – LNB - LNBREF OFF. NOTE: The BUC and LNB Power and Reference are not currently available for the AMT-73L modem. The AMT-73L also has only one Rx input. The following example programs the modem to 8PSK, ¾ Rate TPC, the data rate to 256 kbps, and the Tx and Rx L band frequencies set as indicated. The demodulator utilizes the FFT mode for acquisition. Figure 10: Modem Commands Quick Start Guide PARAMETER CURRENT VALUE TX Main Menu DESIRED VALUE MOD UNITS CARR FRQ DATA CODE RATE RSRATE SGN DIFF INPUT OUTPUT TX SPTRM INV ALPHA SCRAM INTL REF QPSK BPS 1000000000Hz 005000000BPS INTELSAT 1/2 OFF ON ON INTERNAL_PRBS LBAND 2_23 NORMAL 0.35 ON DEPTH4 OFF 8PSK BPS 1234567000Hz 256000BPS TPC4K 3/4 OFF OFF ON EXTERNAL LBAND Any Either 0.35 ON Either Either INTERFACE Menu CARD MODE rs530 Any, except disable PARAMETER CURRENT VALUE RX Main Menu DESIRED VALUE DEMOD UNITS CARR FRQ DATA CODE RATE DESCRAM RSRATE LNBTO LNBVP LNBPWR REF ALPHA DIFF SSIZE SWEEP SPTRM INV INPUT QPSK BPS 1000000000Hz 005000000BPS INTELSAT 1/2 ON OFF OFF OFF OFF EXT 0.35 ON 50000 250000 AUTO INPUT1 8PSK BPS 1234590000Hz 256000BPS TPC4K 3/4 ON OFF OFF or ON OFF or ON OFF INT or EXT 0.35 ON Auto, FFT mode Auto, FFT mode AUTO INPUT1 or 2 DEPTH4 ON Either ON RAW DATA INTERLEAVER DESCRAM 65 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation PARAMETER CURRENT VALUE DESIRED VALUE INTERFACE Menu TX TTINV CLOCKING OFF LOCAL OFF or ON Any, depending on operation INTERFACE Menu LOOPBACK LINE LOCAL LINE LOCAL LINE LOCAL LINE FAR LINE FAR LINE FAR SYSTEM LOCAL SYSTEM FAR SYSTEM LOCAL SYSTEM FAR SYSTEM LOCAL SYSTEM FAR PARAMETER LNB REF OFFSET SPTRM FFT CURRENT VALUE DESIRED VALUE OFF 0 OFF or ON 0 OFF ON INTERFACE Menu RX RTEDGEINV OFF OFF or ON CLOCKING LOCAL Any, DTE_TT and LOCAL invoke the Doppler Buffer INTERFACE Menu BUFFER BUFFER MODE BUFFER DEPTH AUTO ---- MANUAL or AUTO 32-65536 bytes, automatically selected in AUTO mode ENTER the changed values from the TX and RX menus, then page down to RECONFIGURE = READY, press enter and then enter again to CONFIRM. If other options are selected, the modem verifies that the parameters selected are within range. If not in range, the display will present a msg. FEC not supported. If this occurs, use Figure 10 to determine which parameter is out of range. If the parameters are within range, the msg. following CONFIRM is Current settings saved. When all of the parameters are entered and confirmed, now would be the time to connect the modem to the satellite feed, turn on the TX carrier (SGN = ON), followed by the BUC and LNB voltages and reference. Finally, adjust the TX POWER to the desired power level. 4.2 The Front Panel The AMT-70 can be fitted with one of three front panels: a basic indicator-only version typically used with the “in the field” units (network downstream) where the units are managed through the network management facilities; a more advanced front panel which additionally includes a keypad and an LCD that allows the customer to configure and control the modem directly, and a special active front panel with a keypad and LCD for the AMT-73L modem. The interface supports the same command set used to configure the modem via the other M&C interfaces. 4.2.1 Panel Indicators All AMT-70 front panels include a series of LED indicators. The LEDs indicate critical system status information as illustrated in the previous are described below. LEDs that illuminate GREEN indicate that the function is in operation. LEDs that illuminate RED indicate a fault condition. 66 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation Figure 11: The AMT-70 Front Panel LED Status BUC Power: LNB Power: Transmit On: RX 1 Fault: Green Green Green Red / Off RX 2 Fault: TX Fault: Red / Off Red Prime Power Green Description Indicates that the BUC power is enabled Indicates that the LNB power is enabled Indicates that the modulator is transmitting. Indicates that the demodulator channel 1 is not locked to a received signal (if OFF the channel is locked). Reserved Indicates that the modulator is not transmitting, due to a fault (or user intervention). Indicates that the power supply current is received by the management card. Figure 12: The AMT-73L Active Front Panel Prime Power Transmit On Receive Lock Receive Fault Transmit Fault 67 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation Figure 13: The AMT-73L Front Panel LEDS LED Status Prime Power: Green Transmit On: Receive Lock Receive Fault TX Fault: Green Green Red / Off Red Description Indicates that the power supply current is received by the management card Indicates that the modulator is transmitting. Indicates that demodulator is locked to incoming signal Indicates that the demodulator is exhibiting a fault condition. Indicates that the modulator is not transmitting, due to a fault (or user intervention). 4.2.2 Keypad & Display The advanced front panel adds a Vacuum Florescent Display and a numeric keypad. The screen can display two lines of 40 characters each with a wide viewing angle. The keypad is comprised of 10 numeric keys [0-9], 4 arrow keys, an ENT (enter) key, and CLR (clear) key. The functions of the keypad buttons are provided in Figure 14. The front panel implements a system of seven (7) nested menus, displaying the available options and parameters. The keypad allows the user to navigate through these menus to monitor and control the AMT-70 modem by viewing and editing parameters as required. The display has a blinking solid-block cursor that flashes over the current selected item. The sixteen push buttons are used to navigate the menu system and to select or edit the required option or parameter. Functional descriptions of each of the sixteen push buttons can be found in the table below. Button Function RIGHT Moves the cursor to the right through designated fields. Can also be used for navigation from the top line to the bottom line of the VFD display (and vice versa) by toggling to the right through fields. LEFT Moves the cursor to the left through designated fields. Can also be used for navigation from the top line to the bottom line of the VFD display (and vice versa) by toggling to the left through fields UP ENT Moves the cursor up through designated fields. Primarily used to edit parameters such as L-Band Output frequency etc. Can also be used to set a ‘+’ on the sign position for signed parameters Can also be used for navigation from the bottom line to the top line of the VFD display by toggling up through fields. Moves the cursor down through designated fields. Primarily used to edit parameters such as L-Band Output frequency etc. Can also be used to set a ‘-’ on the sign position for signed parameters or can also be used for navigation from the top line to the bottom line of the VFD display by toggling down through fields. Used to navigate through the menu structure or to accept an edited parameter. CLR Used to exit the current menu and return to the previous menu. DOWN 68 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation Button Function NUM [0-9] Used to enter digit number ranging 0 to 9. Figure 14: Keypad Buttons and their Usage. 4.2.3 Welcome Menu The modem powers up showing a welcome screen displaying the product name of the modem and the company name etc. An example of this is shown in the next figure. Pressing any key will move the display to the main menu. The Main menu is entered when any button on the keypad is depressed and released. C o p y r A M T 7 0 i g S h t ( a t e l C ) A l t i d e M v a n t e c o d e m R h A e M T a d 2 0 0 4 - 2 0 0 5 y 4.2.4 Main Menu The Main menu offers the option to enter the branch menus. A sample of main menu is shown in the next figure. Hereinafter, only one sample will be given to describe the operation for each type of the menu components. S E L E C T : T X I RX N T E RF A C E M O N I T O R F U N C With the flashing block cursor highlighting the first character of the name of the currently selected function on the menu, pressing the ENT (enter) key will take the user to the corresponding branch menu display (see Paragraph 4.2.5 below). Pressing the CLR (clear) key will return the display to the Main menu. By pressing the LEFT or RIGHT key, the cursor will move sequentially through the remaining functions items listed in the main menu. These 6 functions are labeled TX, RX, INTERFACE, TEST, MONITOR, and FUNC. The first 5 functions should be intuitively understood (TX for modulator functions, RX for demodulator functions, and etc), whereas the latter (FUNC) will become more familiar by selecting the category and leafing through the parameters. However, some parameter acronyms are not so intuitive, and will be explained further in this Section of the manual. 4.2.5 Menu Tree Structure The 6-function front-panel menu trees are shown over the next few pages. As illustrated, the selections (tree branches) vary according to different enabled options. In fact, options available include the Turbo Codec, Reed Solomon Codec or IESS308/309/310, DVB-DSNG, various speed grade options, and various interface options. Depending on your modem configuration the menu tree items can vary. 69 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation The lines and arrows to the left (or right) of these figures indicate how to leaf through the menus merely by using the UP, DOWN, LEFT, and RIGHT keys to position the blinking cursor over the first character of the parameter, and then pressing ENT. NOTE: At this time, by pressing ENT, no parameters have changed. The values shown are what are currently being performed, or the last parameter entered in the Command Buffer (see Paragraph 4.2.6). For example, suppose you want to make a change in the transmit power output. The steps would be as follows: From the main menu, position the blinking cursor over the TX (only the first character will be blinking) Press ENT. This puts you into the first set of menus of the TX command list. Arrow DOWN three (3) times. This will cause the blinking cursor to display the next set of TX commands. Arrow RIGHT once. This positions the blinking cursor over the P in POWER. Press ENT. This positions the blinking cursor over the first character (+ or -) of the POWER parameter. Arrow UP or DOWN to change the sign. Continue to change the total value, remembering that the range of 0 to -25 dB cannot be exceeded. If you want to implement (execute) the change, press ENT. If you don’t want to make the change, press CLR. Pressing CLR again following ENT or CLR brings you back to the Main NOTE: If the option is a variable (contents can be changed) pressing the ENT key moves the blinking cursor to the first character of that parameter. Characters can be changed at will, but will not be executed unless the ENT key is depressed (and some functions require the use of the RECONFIGURE field before the command is executed. See If the selected option is a status function, the cursor does not blink on the first character of the parameter, and therefore cannot be changed. It is for viewing only. Menu. 70 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation 4.2.5.1 TX Menu The TX menu displays a submenu specifying the available Top-Level configurations for the Modulator. T X I E S S D V B T P C 4 K T P C 1 6 K O M 7 3 The mode selections are as follow; IESS; This mode is the INTELSAT mode and supports two submodes; 308-309 and TCM (IESS 310 8PSK Trellis coded Modulation). DVB: This mode supports the DVB specified DVB-S and DVB-DSNG standards. TPC4K: This data mode supports the transmission in Turbo mode with a 4Kbit FEC Block size. TPC16K: This data mode supports the transmission in Turbo mode with a 16Kbit FEC Block size. OM73: This scrambling mode is specific for military transmissions. If, for instance, IEEE / 308-309 is selected the Transmit menu appears (discussed in more detail in the next section). The INTELSAT mode is automatically configured by this selection (TCODE INTELSAT), All the configuration parameters for the other configuration options (modulation, rate, …) are presented specifically tailored for this top level selection. The current ACTIVE configuration is always highlighted at this level. 4.2.5.1.1 The Transmit Menu The TRANSMIT menu includes a set of displays that allow the setting of programmable modulator commands. The first display, indicated as TX Menu 1, is entered when the cursor in the MAIN MENU is placed over TX, and the ENTER key is depressed and released. Navigating between the (6) TX Menus is accomplished using the ARROW UP and DOWN keys – requiring two strokes to change between menus. For instance, for the IESS / 308-309 selection the top menu is as follow; 3 08 CO DE R A T = E = I NT 1 / E L 2 S A T M O D U L A T O R = R S R A T E = O F Q P S K F The first field (CODE=INTELSAT) is read/only a preset for the selection. All other fields are read/write. To change a parameter, arrow to the parameter, hit ENT, then either ARROW UP or DOWN to the desired value, and hit ENT again. Some parameters require the activation of the RECONFIGURE function in TX Menu 6. To activate, ARROW DOWN to RECONFIGURE, hit ENT twice, and if the parameter is accepted (within the range of settings as defined in paragraph 4.2.6) the msg. of “Current settings saved” appears. If it is not accepted, a msg. of “Parameter out of range” appears. 71 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation 4.2.5.1.2 Available settings and parameters The general menu below shows all the options relative to all modes. Depending on the selected mode some parameters may not be valid and hence will not be displayed as options. Figure 15: Front Panel Display TX (transmit) Menu TX Menu 1 T X : M a b O D= U N I T Q P S K C A R R . B P S K (Carrier Freq. from 950,000,000 to 2,000,000,000Hz – L Band IF) O Q P S K Q (Carrier Freq. from 104 to 176 MHz – 140 MHz IF) O Q P S K I (Carrier Freq. from 52 to 88 MHz – 70 MHz IF) 1 6 8 P S K S = F R Q= 1 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 H z Q A M B P S D A T A = 0 0 2 0 4 8 0 0 0 S P S (Data Rate from 32,000 to 150,000,000bps or sps) b p s . TX Menu 2 T X : C O D E= N O N E O M 7 P 3 O W E R = - 1 5 d b m (Power from 0 to -25 dBm in 0.1 dB steps) T P C 1 6 T P C 4 K I N T E L K S A T D S N G D V B S a b R A T E = 7 / 8 5 / 3 2 1 / 2 1 9 / 8 / 9 3 / 5 2 / 5 R S R A T O F F 6 1 2 6 / 4 2 1 9 / 3 2 E = 0 TX Menu 3 72 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation T X : S G N = O N O F I N P U T = F E X T E R N A L M P E G _ I N T D I F F = O N O F A _ E R N A L V B R _ E X T _ P R B S A _ A S I M P E G _ A S I M P E G _ a b V I V I F 4.2.5.2 RX Menu The RECEIVE menu includes displays that allow the setting of programmable demodulator commands. The first display, indicated as RX Menu 1, is entered when the cursor in the MAIN MENU is placed over RX, and the ENTER key is depressed and released. Navigating between the set of RX Menus is accomplished using the ARROW UP and DOWN keys – requiring two strokes to change between menus. For instance, for the IESS / 308-309 selection the top menu is as follows; 3 08 CO DE R A T = E = I NT 1 / E L 2 S A T M O D U L A T O R = R S R A T E = O F Q P S K F The first field (CODE=INTELSAT) is read/only a preset for the selection. All other fields are read/write. To change a parameter, arrow to the parameter, hit ENT, then either ARROW UP or DOWN to the desired value, and hit ENT again. Some parameters require the activation of the RECONFIGURE function in TX Menu 6. To activate, ARROW DOWN to RECONFIGURE, hit ENT twice, and if the parameter is accepted (within the range of settings as defined in paragraph 4.2.6) the msg. of “Current settings saved” appears. If it is not accepted, a msg. of “Parameter out of range” appears. To change a parameter, arrow to the parameter, hit ENT, then either ARROW UP or DOWN to the desired value, and hit ENT again. Some parameters require the activation of the RECONFIGURE function in TX Menu 6. To activate, ARROW DOWN to RECONFIGURE, hit ENT twice, and if the parameter is accepted (within the range of settings as defined in Paragraph 4.2.6) the msg. of “Current settings saved” appears. If it is not accepted, a msg. of “Parameter out of range” appears. 4.2.5.2.1 The available Settings and Parameters The general RX menu below shows all the options relatives to all modes. Depending on the selected mode some parameters may not be valid and hence will not be displayed as options. 73 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation Figure 16: Front Panel Display RX (transmit) Menu RX Menu 1 R X : a b D U E M O D= N I T S= Q P S K C A R R . B P S K (Carrier Freq. from 950,000,000 to 2,000,000,000Hz – L Band IF) O Q P S K (Carrier Freq. from 104 to 176 MHz – 140 MHz IF) O Q P S K (Carrier Freq. from 52 to 88 MHz – 70 MHz IF) 1 6 8 P S K F R Q= 1 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 H z Q A M B P S D A T A= 0 0 2 0 4 8 0 0 0 S P S (Data Rate from 32,000 to 150,000,000bps or sps) b p s . RX Menu 2 R X : C O D E= N O N E O M 7 D E S C R A M= O N 3 O F T P C 1 6 T P C 4 K I N T E L F K S A T D S N G D V B S a b R A T E = 7 / 8 5 / 3 / 2 / 3 1 / 2 1 9 / 8 / 9 3 / 5 2 / 5 R S R A T O F F 6 1 2 6 4 2 1 9 2 E = 0 RX Menu 3 R X : a b A D L I P H A= F F= 0 . 2 5 0 . 3 5 O N O F S S F S I Z E= 0 0 1 4 1 0 H Z 0 0 5 0 0 0 (From 0 to 500,000 Hz) W E E P = 0 0 H z (From 0 to 20,000,000 Hz) 74 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation RX Menu 4 R X : S P T R M . I N V= A U T I O R A W . D A T A= O N N V E R T O F F N O R M A L a b I NP UT = I NP UT 1 I L O O P B A C K I N P U T N T E R L E A V E R = D E P T H 4 D E P T H 8 0 H z 2 RX Menu 5 R X : R E F= I N T O E X T a b L N B . F F S E T= + 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (Range = + or – 0 to 2,000,000,000 Hz) R E F= O F F S P T R M . F F T= O N O N O F F A U T O RX Menu 7 T X : R E C O N F I G U R E= R E A D Y C O N F a b I R M (RUNNING appears momentarily, followed by Current settings saved) 4.2.5.3 INTERFACE Menu The INTERFACE menu branches into six submenus labeled MODE, TX, RX, BUFFER, LOOPBACK and REV.The CARD sub menu provides a means for selecting one of the interface types available within the modem. The TX and RX sub menus display the information rate of the modem, allow the selection of the appropriate timing and allow the clock edge and data polarity to be configured. The Interface menu is entered when the cursor in the MAIN MENU is placed over INTERFACE, and the ENTER key is depressed and released. Selection of one of the sub menus is by using the ARROW LEFT or RIGHT keys, then hitting ENT for the desired sub menu. I N T E R F M O D E T A C E : X R X B U F F E R L O O P B A C K R E V The DATA RATE parameter in the INTERFACE TX and RX sub menus are updated when the DATA rate parameters are changed in the TX and/or RX menus. It will exhibit the same data rate as was entered when BPS is selected, and will exhibit the actual transmission rate if SPS is selected. 75 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation NOTE: TRANSMITTING ALL ZEROS will cause a pure carrier to be transmitted if scrambling is not enabled in Intelsat Modes. Figure 17: Front Panel Display INTERFACE Menu. INTERFACE Sub Menu CARD Menu C A R D M O D E = R S 5 3 0 H S S I E T H E R N E T TX Menu T X : R A T E= 0 2 0 4 8 0 0 0 C L O C K I N G= (Display only) T T I N V = O N O F D A T A . I N V = F I N T E R N A L R S 5 3 D R X L O O P E X T E R N A 0 T F L O N O F F RX Menu R X : R A T E= 0 2 0 4 8 0 0 0 C L O C K I N G= D E M O D D T (Display only) L R T E D G E I N V= O F F D A T A . I N V= O N E _ T T O C A L O N O F F BUFFER Menu B U F F E R . M O D E= M A N U A L A U T B U F F E R . D E P T B U F E R. US F H = A G E = O 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 b y t e s (buffer size is up to 65,535 bytes) 2 LOOPBACK Menu 76 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation L I N E . L O C A L = O N O F L I N E . F A R = O N O F S Y S T E M . L F F O C A L = O N O F S Y S T E M . F A R = F O N O F F RX Menu 2 REV S W . R E V = 1 . 2 x 4.2.5.4 MONITOR Menu The MONITOR menu (Figure 18) branches into four submenus labeled SUMMARY, TX, RX and LOG. Selection of one of the submenus is made by using the ARROW LEFT or RIGHT keys and hitting ENT for the desired submenu. The SUMMARY is a single page summary of critical Modem parameters. Figure 18: Front Panel Display MONITOR Menu MONITOR Sub Menu M O N I SU T O R : M M A R Y T X R X L O G The TX/RX the monitor menu implements the monitoring functions for the modulator / demodulator, a periodic update (five seconds) is applied to the relevant statistical counters / status bits. The LOG option implements the front-panel log file browsing function. When this option is selected, the LCD is auto-refreshed if the browsing is set at the top of the log (just after the option is selected and a new event occurs). While scrolling the log, searching for messages the auto-refresh is stopped and restarted if the last messages on the LCD are the one at the top of the log. TX Menu 1 C O D I N G : I N T E L S A T (Displays the current Active coding type) M O D U L A T I O N : Q P S K (Displays the current Active Modulation) TX Menu 2 77 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation C O D E . R A T E : 1 / 2 (Current Active FEC rate) D A T A R A T E : 1 6 4 0 0 0 B P S (Rate is per Tx data rate in BPS mode, Transmission Rate in SPS) C A R R I E R . F R E Q U E N C Y : 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 H Z (Current Active carrier frequency) A L P H A : 0 . 3 5 (Current Active alpha setting) X Menu 3 TX Menu 4 J I T T E R : 3 4 H Z Measure of input jitter – should be less than 1000Hz PO W E R : - 2 5 . 0 d B m (Range is 0 to -25 dBm) TX Menu 5 S P T R M . I N V : N I S Y M B O L . R A T E : O R M A L N V E R T E D 4 s 1 6 0 0 0 p s (Rate is Tx SYMBOL rate in BPS mode, Tx Rate in SPS) TX Menu 6 I N P U T . S T R E A M : L O C K E D (Locked means input is OK, unlocked means rate is wrong or clock is absent FI R M W A R E . S T A T E : P R O G R A M M E D (Should be programmed. This indicates the FPGA status of the modulator) 78 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation RX Menu 1 D E C O D I N G : I N T E L S A T (Displays the current Active coding type) M O D U L A T I O N : Q P S K (Displays the current Active Modulation) RX Menu 2 C O D E . R A T D A T A R A T E E : 1 : 1 / 2 (Current Active FEC rate) 6 4 0 0 0 B P S (Rate is per Tx data rate in BPS mode, Transmission Rate in SPS) RX Menu 3 C A R R I E R . F R E Q U E N C Y : 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 H Z (Current Active carrier frequency) A L P H A : 0 . 3 5 (Current Active alpha setting) Rx Menu 4 S N R : 1 5 . 6 9 5 d B (0 to 30 dB. Display moves left after first update) E S T . B E R : < 5 . 0 e - 1 0 -3 10 Range is from >2 X 10 to <1 X 10- ) RX Menu 5 E B N O : 1 1 . 2 2 4 5 d B (0 to 30 dB. Display moves left after first update) B E R : u n l o c k e d (0 to 30 dB – works when Mod is in PRBS test mode) RX Menu 6 O F F S E T : - 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 0 0 0 H z (+0 xxx xxx xxx Hz) S P E C . I N V : N O R M A L I N V E R T 79 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation RX Menu 7 PO W E R . T I M I A G C : - 5 0 d B m (+10 dB from -80 dBm to -20 dBm – AMT-70; to +10 dBm with AMT-73L) N G . L O C K : O N O F F (Status of symbol timing recovery) RX Menu 8 R S . V I T E R B I . L O C K : O N O F A G C . L O C K : F (Status of RS Viterbi, if RS Viterbi used) F (Status of digital AGC function) O N O F RX Menu 9 C A R R I E R . L O C K : O N O F D E F R A M E R . L O C K : F (Status of carrier recovery) O N O F F (Status of Turbo deframer – for turbo modes) RX Menu 10 E X T . C O D I N G . L O C K : O N O F S I G N A L . A B O V E : F (Summary status of FEC Lock) O N O F F (Indication of input level – AMT70 only) Rx Menu 11 S I G NA L . BE L O W : O N O F FI R M W A R E . S T A T E : F (Indication of input level – AMT70 only) O N O F F (Demodulator FPGA status) RX Menu 12 A L L . LN S T B P W R A T E S . L O C K : O N O F F : O F F O N (Summary Receive / demodulator alarm) (DC power applied to LNB – AMT70 only) RX Menu 13 80 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation L N B T O N E : O F F O N L N B V P : O F (Turns 10MHz tone on and off to LNB) F O N (Switches LNB power between 13V and 18v) 4.2.5.5 FUNCTION Menu The FUNCTION menu (Figure 19) branches into five submenus labeled INFO, CONFIG, CONTROL, TESTS and REBOOT. F U N C : I N F O C O N F I G C O N T R O L T E S T S R E B O O T The INFO selection displays the modem hardware / software base configuration. The CONFIG allow you to configure the modem with DEFAULT or user defined configurations. The CONTROL option is used to configure ancillary modem hardware like interface ports and external units to the modem like the BUC and LNB. The TEST option supports the loop-back tests, hardware control and statistical counters RESET. The REBOOT implements thea software reboot. 4.2.5.5.1 The INFORMATION submenu The INFOrmation menu displays the manufacturing information for the modem; the serial number the maintenance software version currently in use in the modem, the RX and TX software versions, the manufacturing date, manufacturing options fitted and the measured 12 VDC from the modem’s power supply. M O D E L : A M T 7 0 S E R I : M 0 1 2 A L 4.2.5.5.2 0 3 4 The CONFIGURATION submenu The CONFIGuration menu allows a series of modem configurations to be programmed and stored in memory, then recalled whenever a particular configuration is called upon for use. These CONFIG menus could be considered as the “station select” buttons on a car radio. The stations are preprogrammed for local stations in the area, and then are selected to suit the listener’s format. The DEFAULT command allows the original modem parameters to be recalled in the event memory selection was temporary, or was incorrectly programmed. 81 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation D E F A U L T L O A D . C F G S T O R E . C O N The default parameters are read/only and cannot be changed. There are up to 10 memory locations that can be programmed, with each being able to store and retrieve a complete set of parameters to include TX and RX carrier frequency, data rate, FEC type, FEC code rate, type of scrambler, and etc. L O A D . C F C O N F G UR I S T O R E . C O N F I G : C F G UR A T I O N NO : C L E A R O R 1 T HR U 9 I O N NO : C L E A R O R 1 T HR U 9 G : A T 4.2.5.5.3 The CONTROL submenu The CONTROL submenu is used to sets up the modem ports and peripherals. C O N T R O L P O R T S B U C L 4.2.5.5.4 N B L C D The CONTROL/PORTS/NETWORK option The NETWORK menu sets up the IP address for the modem when using the 10/100BaseT Ethernet M&C port. There are two sets of IP addresses; PRIMARY NIC (Network Interface Card) or SECONDARY NIC. In normal use, only the PRIMARY NIC need be programmed, which is for the modem. The SECONDARY NIC is only for the demodulator, and is used during factory testing. Figure 19: Front Panel Display FUNC (function) Menu. NETWORK Sub Menu NET W O R K : P R I M A R Y N I C S E C O N D A R Y N I C NETWORK Menu 1 P R I M M A D D R= 1 9 2 . 1 6 8 . 2 5 4 . 2 3 8 A S K= 2 5 5 . 2 5 5 . 2 5 5 . 0 0 0 NETWORK Menu 2 82 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation PR I M G A T E W A Y = 1 9 2 . 1 6 8 . 2 5 4 . 2 3 8 2 3 7 NETWORK Menu 3 S C N D A M D D R= 1 9 2 . 1 6 8 . 2 5 4 . 2 3 7 A S K= 2 5 5 . 2 5 5 . 2 5 5 . 0 0 0 NETWORK Menu 4 SC N D G A T E W A Y = 4.2.5.5.5 1 9 2 . 1 6 8 . 2 5 4 . The CONTROL/PORTS/RS485 option The RS485 menu provides the means to setup the address of the modem’s RS-485 M&C port, plus provides a means for setting the type of communication (packet or command mode), the baud rate, the parity, the number of data bits, and the number of stop bits for the asynchronous data port. More information about the two methods of communication is provided in subsequent sections of this manual. R S 4 8 5 A D R S= 0 0 5 D e c = n o n e p a c k e t c o m m a n (Addresses from 1-15) C O N T R O L d RS485 Menu 2 R S 4 8 5 S P E E D= D A T A B I 0 0 4 8 0 0 0 0 9 6 0 0 E V E N 0 1 9 2 0 0 O D D 0 3 8 4 0 0 0 5 7 2 0 0 1 1 5 2 0 0 T S = 8 7 P A R I S T T Y= O P B I N O N E T S = 1 2 83 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation 4.2.5.5.6 The CONTROL/BUC submenu The CONTROL/BUC submenu is used to sets up the BUC when this support is fitted on the modem. B U C P O W E R = R E F O F F E R E N C E = O F F The BUC power can be turned ON/OFF from the front panel. The BUC is controlled by the modulator card on the modem. If the BUC status is changed, an event is recorded to the log. The REFERENCE option can be turn ON/OFF the 10Mhz clock reference. 4.2.5.5.7 The CONTROL/LNB submenu The CONTROL/LNB submenu is used to set up the modem ports and peripherals. L N B P O W E R = T O N E= O F O F F F R E F P O L E R E N C E = O F A R I O N= S A T I F O F F This option appears if a demodulator is fitted on the modem. The POWER option controls the LNB power status. The REFERENCE controls if the 10Mhz reference clock is used. The TONE option set the 22kHz tone ON/OFF. Finally, the POLARIZATION sets the LNB polarization. 4.2.5.5.8 The CONTROL/LCD submenu The CONTROL/LCD submenu is used to configure the LCD brightness and support a basic screen saver for the LCD. L C D : B R I G H N E S S S C R E E N _ S A V E R The brightness setting is be set by selecting the option BRIGHNESS. The brightness level can be set by using the numeric keys 1-8 or the up/down arrow keypad buttons. The screen-saver is used to turn off the LCD. When [ENTER] is pressed the LCD is turned OFF. Pressing any key after the LCD is turned off wake-up the LCD and restore the active state. 84 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation 4.2.5.5.9 The TESTS submenu The TEST menu branches into three submenus labeled MODE, LEDTEST and RESET. T E S T : M O D E L E D T E S T R E S E T The MODE option The MODE sub menu provides a means for generating a pure carrier from the modulator, and for placing the modulator and demodulator into an IF loop-back. M O D E CO T NT X . I L N UO US . W A V E = O O P B A C K = O F O F F F NOTE: Activating Continuous Wave will cause the modulator to generate a pure carrier, which will disrupt traffic, and may cause interference to satellite operations. The LEDTEST option The LEDTEST provides a means of testing the front panel LED indicators. The RESET option R E S E T : T X S TA T S R X . S TA TS Reset the mod / demodulator statistical counters The RESET option is used to RESET the modulator / demodulator statistical counters. 4.2.5.5.10 The REBOOT option Finally, the REBOOT option allows you to reboot the modem front-panel without disconnecting the power cable from the back. Before to perform the operation the front-panel ask for a confirmation as below. R E B O O T R e b oot t he m od e m ? [ E N T E R ] or [ C L E A 4.2.6 Executing Variable Commands from the Front Panel In some cases, when a parameter is changed (such as TX PWR , etc.) followed by ENTER, the parameter is executed immediately. These are independent parameters, since changing their values do not affect any other parameter in the menu. 85 R ] AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation However, there are certain command parameters in the TX and RX menus that are dependant on the settings of other parameters, such as TX or RX UNITS , MODulation or DEMODulation, FEC CODE, code RATE, RSRATE, and DATA rate, and therefore all of the parameters need to be checked and changed if necessary. Executing these commands is performed using the RECONFIGURE = READY/CONFIRM function in the TX and RX menus, respectively. Figure 20 below shows the valid parameters. NOTE: TX and RX RECONFIGURE commands from the front panel are TRESET and RRESET in the CLI mode (RS-232 or RS-485 interface). Currently, TX and RX CARRIER FREQ also require that RECONFIGURE in the TX and RX menus to be executed, but there are no restrictions for any of the FEC Types shown in the figure. Figure 20: Acceptable Parameters for FEC Type FEC Type Code Rate Viterbi, Intelsat4 ½, ¾, ⅞ Reed Solomon 219 or 126 Viterbi, Intelsat ⅔ Trellis 219 or 126 Viterbi, DSNG ⅔, 5/6, 8 /9 ¾, ⅞ Viterbi, DSNG Viterbi, DVBS2 ½, ⅔, ¾, 5/6, ⅞ Modulation Scrambler BPSK, QPSK, OQPSK 8PSK Automatic – 204,188 Automatic – 204,188 Automatic – 204,188 None2 Uncoded None OM732 Uncoded, None ½, ¾ 2 /5, 3/5, 8 /9, 19/20 None ¾ None TPC16K2,5 TPC4K2 Units Data Rate On/Off Diff Coding On/Off SPS/BPS On/Off On/Off SPS/BPS 8PSK Always On N/A SPS/BPS Must be within Symbol Rate of 32 ksps to 40 Msps Must be within Symbol Rate of 32 ksps to 40 Msps Must be within Symbol Rate of 32 ksps to 40 Msps 16QAM Always On N/A SPS/BPS QPSK, OQPSK Always On N/A SPS/BPS BPSK, QPSK, OQPSK, 8PSK, 16QAM BPSK, QPSK, OQPSK On/Off On/Off SPS/BPS Must be within Symbol Rate of 32 ksps to 40 Msps On/Off On/Off SPS/BPS Must be within Symbol Rate of 32 ksps to 40 Msps BPSK, QPSK, OQPSK, 8PSK, 16QAM BPSK, QPSK, OQPSK, 8PSK, 16QAM On/Off N/A SPS/BPS Must be within Symbol Rate of 32 ksps to 40 Msps On/Off N/A SPS/BPS Must be within Symbol Rate of 32 ksps to 40 Msps Must be within Symbol Rate of 32 ksps to 40 Msps Must be within Symbol Rate of 32 ksps to 40 Msps ENTER the changed values from the TX or RX menu, then arrow down to the RECONFIGURE= READY, press ENTER and then ENTER again to CONFIRM. 4 5 Offset QPSK is limited to 20MSymbols/Sec Only 8/9 or 19/20 Code Rates make sense for 8PSK and 16QAM Modulation schemes. 86 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation CHAPTER 5 MANAGING THE MODEM It is recommended that Chapter 3 be reviewed to understand the operational features of this modem prior to setting up the modem. 5.1 Using the RS-232 Port Initial access to the modem is via a RS-232 asynchronous serial port that is available for the external monitor and control of the modem functions. The input is a 9-pin female D connector (P7 for the AMT70 and J11 for the AMT-73L), on the rear panel. To use the rear panel serial connector, attach an ASCII terminal to the D connector as labeled above. The input data is applied to pin 3, and the output data is available at pin 2. A standard one-to-one cable from the 9-pin COM port of a PC will provide the proper connection. When you use HyperTerminal (Windows) or Minicom (Linux), the port configuration setup must be as follows: 57600/N/8/1. Note: Some PCs do not respond well to the +5 VDC applied to pin 9 (refer to Paragraph 8.7 for pin-outs). Since the RS-232 port is not addressable, it can be used A User ID and Password is required for gaining access to the modem. From the factory, the User ID and Password is set to: Userid = root Password = adminop It is recommended that the password be changed upon delivery to protect the settings of the modem. Follow the steps starting on Paragraph 5.4 for gaining access and controlling the modem, along with setting up the RS-485 port address, speed, parity, number of data bits, and stop bits. Further in this Chapter are also instructions for setting up the IP address and subnet mask of the two Ethernet ports. 5.2 Using RS-485 Rear Panel Remote M&C A dual function RS-485 (P8 for the AMT-70 and J13 for the AMT-73) port is also present at the rear panel. This port is set to 4-wire operation. For monitor and control over this port the mcadd command must be used in order to define the tributary address of the modem. The RS-485 port can be controlled by different protocols; ASCII, binary packet mode or BUC control. Using the RS-485 port with the command or packet protocol allows a number of modems to be controlled from a client PC. Each modem being controlled on the same bus must have a unique address set. Refer to Chapter 8 of this document for further information and instructions for setting the RS-485 addresses and modes. Refer to Paragraph 8.10 for pin-outs. 87 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation 5.3 Using the Ethernet Port The back panel Ethernet modem management port (P6 for the AMT-70 and J9 for the AMT-73L) is used to interface the modem with the network. This port is dedicated to receive and process the management requests. These requests come from a workstation and/or a management server station. The modem network management is based on the TCP/IP protocol suite. The typical client applications TELNET / FTP are used to manage the modem. The M&C demod port (P7 for the AMT-70 and J10 for the AMT-73L) is used only for downloading the firmware on the demodulator card. Both ports support the dual speed 10/100 Mbps. At power on, the speed is negotiated between the modem and the repeater/hub/router on your network. For setting the unit network / routing addresses, the CLI commands tsetcfg /rsetcfg are used. They are discussed in more detail later on in this chapter. The network setting can also be configured through the front-panel using the FUNC/NETWORK (Figure 19) selection. When connecting a PC Ethernet port directly to the modem (P6 or J9, as above), use a crossover cable. Refer to Paragraph 0 for pin-outs of the 10/100 Ethernet ports. 5.4 Starting the Modem When the modem is powered up, the following message appears on the terminal connected to the back-panel serial interface (P6 or M&C Interface); Coldfire Bootloader (Mar 19 2004 - 13:28:54) CPU: MOTOROLA Coldfire MCF5272 Board: ADVANTECHAMT-70 Modems DRAM: 16 MB FLASH: 8 MB Hit any key to stop autoboot: 0 ## Booting image at ffc40000 ... Image Name: Data Size: 789214 Bytes = 770 kb = 0 MB Load Address: 00040000 Entry Point: 00040000 Verifying Checksum ... OK Uncompressing Kernel Image ... OK Linux version 2.4.17-uc0 (root@lyvon) (gcc version 2.95.3 20010315 (release) (Coldfire patches 3 uClinux/COLDFIRE(m5272) 88 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation COLDFIRE port done by Greg Ungerer, [email protected] Flat model support (C) 1998,1999 Kenneth Albanowski, D. Jeff Dionne On node 0 total pages: 4096 ………………. M41T94 Real Time Clock Driver loaded Resetting modulator/demodulator (LOW) Command: powercyc 1 Initializing modulator/demodulator (HIGH) …………….. DEMOD: Initialization in progress() …… MOD: MOD_Init() MODULATOR: Initialization in progress() Command: Execution Finished, Exiting ……. Figure 21: Booting the modem 5.5 Login to the modem The logon to the AMT-70/73L modem from the serial port or Telnet in command line mode is described below: uClinux login: root Password: AMT-70 Modem Software - V1.0 Copyright (c) ADVANTECHAMT 1998-2004, All Rights Reserved AdvantechAMT 2002-2003, All Right Reserved Shell invoked to run file: /sbin/msh.sh Command: cd /sbin Command: ./msh AMT-70 Modem Control Shell # The default manufacturing login userid / password are: Userid: root - Password: adminop Figure 22: Login to the modem in Command Line Mode (CLI) After the logon is completed, the prompt character # shall appear. At this point the modem shell is active and allows you to configure and control the modem. 89 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation 5.6 Setting the Security We strongly recommend that the manufacturing installation password is changed during the first setup. The command “passwd” is used for this function as shown below; # passwd Changing password for root Enter the new password (minimum of 5, maximum of 8 characters) (yourpassword) Please use a combination of upper and lower case letters and numbers. Enter new password: (yourpassword) Warning: weak password (continuing). Re-enter new password: Password changed. Figure 23: Changing the Security Code (Password) We strongly recommend keeping your equipment password in a safe place. The system implements a strong password scheme to protect the modem from network intrusion. 5.7 Setting the modem date and time The ATM70 modem series have a standard real time clock fitted. This clock is battery back up and kept the critical system parameters. The clock is also used by the modem software for the timestamp of the log messages and SNMP trap alerts. The command used to set the modem date and time is as follows: # date yyyy.mm.dd-hh:mm:ss yyyy is the year number mm is the month number dd is the day number hh is the hour (24 hour system) mm is the minute number ss is the seconds number 90 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation 5.8 Using the Modem Shell 5.8.1 Command Format The syntax of the commands for the M&C interface is entered in line mode as follows: # [command] [ parameters] ↵ All [commands] and [parameters] must be entered in lower-case. When [enter ↵] is pressed the command is processed by the modem management processor or peripheral / option card for processing. 5.8.1.1 Command Help To get the list of the modulator / demodulator commands supported by your modem model you can type: # help all ↵ HELP: Display alphabetic list of commands: MODEL: Display the modem model. SERIAL: Display the modem serial number. MDATE: Display the modem manufacturing date. ……….. Figure 24: Listing the modem command set 5.8.2 Commands Recall and Editing The user interface supports commands recalls and editing; ↑ Recall the previous command ↓ Recall next command ← Shift left for command editing Backspace Delete the previous character Del Delete the current character !! Execute previous command Figure 25: Modem shell function keys All the commands are kept in a wrap around buffer of 64 commands. Limited command editing is also available through shift-left / shift-right operators. 91 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation 5.8.2.1 Commands Completion Mode All the commands must be entered using the command prefix, a "t" for the modulator and an "r" for the demodulator. While typing a command you can use the (tab→) key to toggle the command completion mode; # t (→tab) Possible completions are: twelve tpn tserial tver ….. # ts (→tab) Possible completions are: tserial tsynth tspinv tscram # tspinv # tspinv ON (→tab) # tspinv OFF (→tab) # tspinv ? (→tab) Figure 26: Using the command completion mode The example as shown above depicts how the command completion mode is used. On the first line, the ‘t’ character is typed followed by the tab character. The modem shell then display all the possible completions for the command. If another character is typed (“ts”) the list is restricted to the commands starting with the prefix “ts”. The command completion mode also supports the completion of the possible parameters for the commands. In the example, tspinv (→ tab) will suggest the parameters “ON” | “OFF” or ? (help). If the second parameter is a numeric value, the lower value / higher value is suggested. 5.8.2.2 Command Completion Mode rcarrier # rcarrier 950000000 # rcarrier 2000000000 # rcarrier ? Syntax Description: RCARRIER frequency=[ 950000000 | 2000000000 | ? ] in Hz Complete Description: Define the input carrier frequency (70 MHz) or L-band in Hz depending on the RLBAND value. To change the output frequency, enter the command followed by the desired 70 MHz or L-band input frequency in Hz. The range of valid values for is 950000000 to 2150000000 in 100 Hz steps (L-band input signal) and 52000000 to 88000000 in 1 Hz steps (70MHz input signal). Figure 27: Using the command completion mode (part #2) Finally, the help option “?” give the complete description of the command syntax and complete description. 92 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation 5.8.3 Scheduling Periodic Commands The user interface allows for the scheduling of commands at specific short interval of time. The command every is used for this function: # every [period] [explicit command] ↵ The [period] is the time interval used to define the periodic interval used to schedule the command. The value can be between 2 - 60 seconds. The explicit command is defined as the command and parameters. # every 5 rber => every 5 rber rber RBER = UNLOCKED => rrber rber RBER = UNLOCKED (CTRL-C) Command scheduling stopped. Figure 28: Scheduling monotonic commands When the command is scheduled, the user interface is not available for scheduling other commands. In order to stop the command scheduling, the character CTRL-C must be used to terminate the command. The format of the input lines are defined as follow; [Command] [Comment line] [Space line] Command to be executed Start with “#”; all remaining characters are ignored. Ignored 5.9 Configuring the RS-485 Port The RS-485 management port is on modem back panel at location P7 (AMT-70) or J13 (AMT-73L) cal setup of this port is configured using the CLI command set below; Figure 29: CLI Command Set for RS-485. Command Description mcadd [addr] Sets the M&C address of the RS485 port in client mode. The range of valid addresses for is 000-255 for any protocol. The address <000> means the RS-485 port is a non-addressable. The addresses <001-255> must uniquely be set for each modem connected to the RS-485 bus. Leading zeros are not required when entering the address. mccontrol [option] MCCONTROL [ COMMAND | PACKET | NONE ] mcspeed [value] Set the port speed; Valid values are 4800, 9600, 19200, 28800, 38400, 57600, 115200. mcparity [parity] Sets the port parity; the values are ODD, EVEN, NONE mcdatabit [data bits] Sets the number of data bits; the values are 7 or 8 93 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation Command Description mcstopbits [stop bits] Sets the number of stop bits; the values are 1 or 2. These values can be set using the command line interface mode or the front-panel FUNC / RS-485 option. After setting the RS-485 port a controlling application must be assigned to this port. The mccontrol command is discussed in Chapter 7. 5.10 Accessing the Modem through a Network 5.10.1 Configuring the network address The modem network access can be configured by using the tsetcfg / rsetcfg commands. The commands syntax is as follows; # tsetcfg ipaddress aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd ↵ and # tsetcfg netmask www.xxx.yyy.zzz ↵ Figure 30: Configuring the Tx Network Address This command is used to configure the network address for the interface P6 (M&C mode for AMT-70) or J9 (M&C mode for the AMT-73L). This is the main management interface for the modem. The Telnet command line interface (CLI) is accessed through this interface. Telnet supports the same command set than the RS232 CLI interface described in this manual. A second interface specific to the demodulator (P1 for AMT-70, or J10 for the AMT-73L) can also be configured with the following commands; # rsetcfg ipaddress aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd↵ and # rsetcfg netmask www.xxx.yyy.zzz↵ Figure 31: Configuring the Rx Network Address This port is used exclusively for the demodulator firmware updates. By default, at manufacturing time, the ports are set at the network address 192.169.1.132 / subnet mask 255.255.255.0 for the main port P1 and 192.169.1.133 / subnet mask 255.255.255.0 for the port P2. Finally, as soon the network addresses are set, they are activated immediately. The modem does not need to be rebooted for performing this function. 5.10.2 Configuring the routing tables The default routing entry is also configured using the tsetcfg / rsetcfg commands: 94 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation # tsetcfg gateway fff.ggg.hhh.iiii↵ (for port P6) and # rsetcfg gateway fff.ggg.hhh.iiii↵ (for port P1) Figure 32: Configuring the static routing tables In summary, these addresses are typically used to define the routing address between a private local area network and Internet. Modem network address and routing definitions are network issues. Refer to your network administrator for the assignment of your network node addresses, network mask and gateway definitions. 5.10.3 Using Telnet for Remote Control After the network information is configured, your modem can be accessed through an Ethernet / Internet network. The remote login is as follows; #telnet www.xxx.yyy.zzz Trying www.xxx.yyy.zzz... Connected to 192.168.1.192 (192.168.1.132). Escape character is '^]'. Login: [userid] Password: [password] AMT-70 Modem Software - V1.0 Copyright (c) ADVANTECHAMT 1998-2004, All Rights Reserved AdvantechAMT 2002-2003, All Rights Reserved Shell invoked to run file: /sbin/msh.sh Command: cd /sbin Command: ./msh AMT-70 Modem Control Shell # tdata # Figure 33: Login using Telnet When you set the terminal emulation on your client PC you must be set to ESC[~ mode or VT100 and the cursor should be set to underscore mode (not block mode) . After a session is established with the modem, theTelnet interface is identical to the serial port interface and support the same command set. The way to close a Telnet session is by using the “bye” command. 95 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation 5.11 Using FTP for Software Download The FTP Windows / UNIX version can be used to download the software upgrade from your server/workstation to your upstream / downstream modems in the field. A typical FTP session is as follow; ftp www.xxx.yyy.zzz Connected to www.xxx.yyy.zzz. 220220- AMT-70 Modem Software 220- Copyright (c) ADVANTECHAMT 1998-2004, All Rights Reserved 220AdvantechAMT 2002-2004, All Right Reserved 220220 FTP Server (Version 1.0) ready KERBEROS_V4 rejected as an authentication type Name (192.168.1.132:root): root 331 Password required for root. Password: adminop 230 User root logged in. Remote system type is UNIX. Using binary mode to transfer files. ftp> bin 200 Type set to I ftp> cd /sbin <= is the download R/W directory 250 CWD command successful [ follow the instructions from the technical support team ] ftp> 227 Entering passive mode 192,168,1,132,8,1 …. ftp> bye 221 Disconnecting, Goodbye. ]# Figure 34: Downloading Software using FTP The modem modulator software is updated from the back panel port P6 and the demodulator software from the port P1. Follow the support group directive for upgrading the software. 96 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation 5.11.1 Downloading from the RS-232 Serial Port If Ethernet is not available (typically if the modem is in the field) the RS-232 serial port can be used for software download using the Zmodem protocol. The Zmodem protocol sends data in 512 byte blocks and uses cyclic redundancy checking to transmit and check the data. Uploading files from the modem to the computer is allowed as well. The computer's serial port should be configured for 19200/N/8/1. Any communication software that allows the Zmodem protocol may be used. To get help for the wrapper program for the Zmodem transfer, enter the following at the prompt: # zdw -h The help Response will be as follows: -F filename -f pass xon/xoff flow control to remote control -j receive files by Zmodem protocol -a use ASCII mode -k send files by Zmodem protocol DOWNLOADING FILES Enter at the prompt, #zdw -j for a binary file, or #zdw -a -j for an ASCII file to download them. A filename is not necessary since the file name has been selected at the computer and will be sent along with the data. UPLOADING FILES Enter at the prompt, #adw -k -F filename for a binary file, or #adw -a -k -F filename for an ASCII file to upload them. The computer should have already been set up to receive files. TERMINATING THE UP/DOWN LOADING To terminate the upload or download, the user enters CTRL-C and then CTRL-A. The termination may be made at any time during the process. 97 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation 5.12 Using SNMP 5.12.1 Introduction The AMT70 modem family supports an SNMP agent. This support must be configured at manufacturing when the modem is ordered. The command “showcfg” can be used to check if SNMP is supported by your modem. If SNMP is fitted on your modem you can use the command “snmpcfg” to configure the agent. 5.12.2 How to configure SNMP The format of the command “snmpcfg” is as follow; snmpcfg [Parameter] [ Value] Parameter Values Description syscontact [value] sysname [value] syslocation [value] rocommunity [value] rwcommunity [value] authtrapenable trapsink 1/0 [network address] trapcommunity [value] MIB-II syscontact; The contact information for the administrator. MIB-II sysname; An administratively-assigned name for this managed node MIB-II syslocation; Location of the modem unit Community name for the GET requests. At manufacturing the value is set to “public”. Community name for the SET requests. At manufacturing the value is set to “private”. Enable / Disable the authentifications trap. Destination Network Address (in the form ‘www.xxx.yyy.zzz’) of the network manager. You can disable the sending of the proprietary trap by setting this address to 0.0.0.0 Community name for the traps requests. At manufacturing the value is set to “public”. The command “snmpconf” list the active SNMP configuration Executing 'snmpconf.def' > snmpcfg syscontact syscontact = Head Office => snmpcfg sysname sysname = Advantech => snmpcfg syslocation syslocation = AdvantechAMT, Dorval, Canada => snmpcfg rocommunity rocommunity = public => snmpcfg rwcommunity rwcommunity = private 98 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation => snmpcfg trapsink trapsink = 0.0.0.0 => snmpcfg trapcommunity trapcommunity = public 5.12.3 The SNMP MIB source file You can get the SNMP agent MIB source file using one of the two methods below; 1.- Through your sales representative. 2.- By uploading the file from your modem; upload the file “amt70_mibs.mib” from the “/sbin” directory. Modem events and logging 5.13 The modem can report unsolicited events (hardware or software) to the end-user through three different mechanisms; 1.- The Serial Port master console interface 2.- The internal LOG file 3.- SNMP Traps The following events are reported as follow; Event Message Description LOG SNMP CONSOLE Trap # 1 Startup Completed This event occurs after the modem is rebooted and the software is initialized yes yes no 2 BUC Power state The BUC power was turned ON yes yes no The BUC power was turned OFF yes yes no The LNB power was turned OFF yes yes no The LNB power was turned ON yes yes no The modulator output is DISABLED yes yes no The modulator output is ENABLED yes yes no The modulator is READY to transmit yes yes no The modulator is in FAULT state yes yes no The demod is UNLOCK yes yes no The demod is LOCK yes yes no This message appears just after the mod / demod software are resetted. yes yes no 3 4 LNB Power state 5 6 Modulator output state 7 8 9 Modulator TX state Demodulator lock state 10 11 Shutting down Figure 35: The modem log events 99 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation Event # Message Description LOG SNMP CONSOLE 12 Redundant Unit Fault yes yes yes 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 Switch Unreadable System unknown state Redundant UNIT ready Active unit fault Both Unit Fault Unit now active This unit redundant yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes Refer to the section “Redundancy” at page 131 for the description of these events. Figure 36: The redundancy system log events 5.13.1 The SNMP traps The previous table defines which specifics traps are sent by the SNMP agent to the network manager. For instance, if the command “BUCPOWER ON/OFF” is issued a message is recorded to the LOG file and an SNMP trap specific (6,2) or (6,3) is sent to the configured destination network manager. 5.13.2 Using the log file An internal log file is kept in order to record all the modem hardware / software events. This log is a RAM file of 16k keeping the most recent alarms and events; The format of a log entry is as follows; [time stamp] [log message line] The log can be browsed using the command; # listlog ↵ When the terminal display is full, the message “—More—“ appears. You can press the bar “space” to continue scrolling the log messages. You can also use the commands CTRL-S to stop the scrolling and CTRL-Q to restart the scrolling on slow terminals. 100 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation Alternatively, the log messages can be browsed on the front-panel using the option MONITOR/LOG. If the LOG file needs to be kept the command; # savelog ↵ can be used to save the log on flash. Typically, the log is kept when you want to upload the file from the modem. Use FTP, set the directory to “/sbin” directory in binary mode with the command “get logfile”. When the modem is shutting down+ with the command “reboot m” the logfile is automatically saved on flash and restored for the next “reboot”. Finally, the logfile can be cleared using the command; # clearlog RESET ↵ while the modem is operational. 101 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation CHAPTER 6 THE MODEM COMMAND SET 6.1 Introduction This chapter describes the AMT-70 remote control, simplified user interface, set-up menu operation, transmit control commands, receive control commands and monitor commands for both transmit and receive. 6.1.1 The Command Syntax The command syntax for the AMT-70 modems is as follows; [parms] The field specifies the command name for the specific card. Typically, all command names for the demodulator are prefixed with “r”, all command for the modulator by “t” and for the interface control “i”. If only the command name is specified it means most of the time that it’s a query request. If the command name is followed by the parm “??” it means it’s a help request. The [parms] field is specific to each command. Typically one parameter is specified for the requests. The figure below shows some example of the commands; Figure 37: AMT70 command syntax Examples RBER TMOD 16QAM TRATE 2/3 Query the demodulator BER rate Set the modulator order to 16QAM Set to code rate to 2/3 RDATA ?? Get the help information for the command. 6.1.2 The Modulator/Demodulator Standard Commands The figure below shows the command set that is common to the modulator and the demodulator. Figure 38: AMT-70 Standard (L-Band or 70 MHz) Configurations PARAMETER MODULATOR COMMAND DEMODULATOR COMMAND REMARKS Command Setting tunits BPS or SPS runits BPS or SPS Get/Set the units for the data rate. When the data interface card is fitted on the modem only the BPS unit can be used. If the card is not installed and ASI input is used BPS or SPS units can be specified. Frequency (L-Band) tcarrier xxxxxxxxxx rcarrier xxxxxxxxxx Get/Set RF output or input frequency in Hz. Frequency (70 MHz) (Optional) tcarrier xxxxxxxx rcarrier xxxxxxxx Get/Set IF output or input frequency in Hz 102 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation Data Rate tdata yyyyyy rdata yyyyyy Get/Set output or input data rate in Hz Modulation Type tmod BPSK, QPSK, 8PSK, 16QAM, OQPSKI, OQPSKQ rdem BPSK, QPSK, 8PSK, 16QAM, OQPSKI OQPSKQ Get / Set the modulator type FEC Code Type tcode INTELSAT DVBS, DSNG, DVBS2S, DVBS2N, TPC4K, TPC16K, or OM73, NONE rcode INTELSAT DVBS, DSNG, TPC4K, TPC16K, OM73, NONE Get / Set FEC code type Define the code type; (note: the codes OM73 and NONE are supported only on the DISA compliant military modem AMT73) Code Rate trate 1/2, 2/3, 3/4, 5/6, 7/8, 2/5, 3/5, 4/5, 8/9, 19/20, or UNCODED rrate 1/2, 2/3,3/4, 5/6, 7/8, 2/5, 3/5, 4/5, 8/9, 19/20, or UNCODED Get / Set the FEC code rate; The code rate 1/4, 1/3, 9/10 are also supported in DVB-S2B mode. Reed Solomon Code Rate trsrate OFF, 210, 126 rrsrate OFF, 210, or 126 Get / Set Reed Solomon code rate Scrambler tscram ON or OFF rdesc ON or OFF Get / Set the scrambler ON or OFF Filter Alpha talpha 0.25 – 0.35 (AMT70) or 0.12 – 0.35 (AMT73L) ralpha 0.25 or 0.35 Get / Set the Nyquist filter roll-off Spectral Invert ON/OFF tspinv ON or OFF rspinv ON, OFF or AUTO Get/Set modulator or demodulator spectral inversion. If demodulator is set to AUTO, it automatically senses incoming spectral inversion and inverts if detected. Only inverts the modulation eye pattern I and Q. Input/Output Sources tinput EXTERNAL, MPEG_VIA_ASI, MPEG_VIA_EXT or INTERNAL_PRB rinput INPUT1, INPUT2, LOOPBACK Get/Set interface sources (Back panel Input / output ports or loopback) Differential Encoder/Decoder tdiff ON or OFF rdiff ON or OFF Get/Set the differential encoder and decoder to ON or OFF 10 MHz Oscillator Reference tfref ON or OFF rfref ON or OFF Get/Set the 10 MHz Reference ON or OFF; Applies the 10 MHz reference to the BUC and/or LNB. Turbo Scrambler mode ttpcs NORMAL or V35 rtpcs NORMAL or V35 Set the compatible Turbo mode on the modulator / demodulator. Reset Modem Software Parameters treset rreset Resets (activate) the modulator or demodulator pending software parameters 103 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation 6.1.3 The Modulator Specific Commands The modulator specific commands are listed below: Figure 39: Monitor Specifics Commands Modulator Specifics Output Interface toutput 70, 140 or L BAND Control output signal frequency PRBS Polynomial tprbs 18 23 2_23 : 1+x + x , 17 23 2_20 : 1+x + x , 14 17 2_17 : 1+x + x , 14 15 2_15 : 1+x + x , 5 6 2_6 : 1+x + x , 18 23 2_23I : 1+x + x , 17 23 2_20I : 1+x + x , 14 17 2_17I : 1+x + x , 14 15 2_15I : 1+x + x , or 5 6 2_6I : 1+x + x (note I means inverted) Get / Set PRBS Polynomial Signal Control tsignal ON or OFF Controls modulator output Output Level tlevel -25.0 to 0.0 Set the output power in dBm (increment .1bDM) Continuous wave mode tcwt OFF or ON Loopback mode tloopback OFF or ON Effective symbol rate tsym When OFF, modulator output is normal; when ON, modulator outputs in CW mode for n seconds Enables/Disables the L-Band Loopback. When the TX loopback mode is set implicitly the receive loopback mode is also set (rinput loopback). Get the effective symbol rate (in sym/s) Input stage jitter tjitter Get the input stage jitter (Hz) Hardware status tstatus 0 (Input Stage Lock) 1 (FPGA programmed) Get the modulator status. The command tstatus with no parameters returns the binary status. If the command is followed by the parameter “details” the decoded status is displayed. Ex: Input stream status = LOCKED FPGA status = PROGRAMMED Pilot tone control tpilots OFF or ON Control if the pilots tone are used for the DVB-S2S – DVB-S2N modes. (for DVB-S2 special demod card) 104 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation 6.1.4 The Demodulator Specific Commands The demodulator specific commands are listed below: Figure 40: Demodulator Specific Commands Demodulator Specifics 6 Received data output rcinv ON or OFF Configure the receive data output Frequency sweep search range rsweep 0 to 20000000 +/- Hz Get / Set frequency sweep search range Raw data over MPEG (DVB) rrmvmk ON or OFF Enable/Disable raw data over MPEG Frequency sweep search step size rssize 0..500000 +/- Hz Set/Set frequency search set size Spectral Analysis (FFT assist) rspanl ON or OFF or AUTO FFT assist On or OFF or AUTO Output select rinput INPUT1, INPUT2 or LOOPBACK Get / Set L-Band output select. LNB Power Control rlnbp ON or OFF Enable/Disable DC power ON6 LNB 22 kHz tone rlnbto ON or OFF Enable/Disable LNB 22 kHz tone on current output (see footnote 2) LNB Vertical Polarization rlnbvp ON or OFF Enable/disable LNB vertical polarization (see footnote 2) Reset Statistics rststa Reset all statistics/status information. Estimated Eb/NO rebno Get Estimated Eb/NO Estimated BER reber Get Estimated BER rate Frequency offset estimated roffset Received frequency offset for programmed (Hz) Estimated Receive power ragc Return the estimated received signal in dBm Tuner TX level signal rpower Show the measured RX level signal (AMT73L only) BER Test Lock rlock Indicates lock condition of BER test mode This command is ignored if RINPUT is set to LOOPBACK. 105 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation Demodulator Specifics Status information rstatus or rstatus details Get internal demodulator status information. The command rstatus with no parameters return the “hex”” status of the peripheral card. # rstatus rstatus = 0x6004 # the command “rstatus details” return the decoded status of the card; # rstatus details Detailled RX Status (6000): Timing lock = OFF Reed Solomon / Viterbi = OFF Digital AGC Lock = OFF Carrier Recovery Lock = OFF Deframing Lock = OFF External Coding Lock = OFF Signal Above Limit = NO Signal Below Limit = YES Firmware State = RUNNING ALL lock state = NO # 6.1.5 Getting the Chassis Configuration and Status Commands that are not specific to the Transmitter (modulator) or Receiver (demodulator) can be executed from the serial port on the rear panel. These commands are summarized in the following sections. 6.1.6 The Monitor and Control Commands The generic commands related to the chassis, front and back panel control are listed below. Figure 41: Monitor Commands Summary Command Description General Commands help Displays an alphabetical list of commands. Parameters are ; “??” for the summary “all” for the list of commands showcfg Display the complete modem configuration installed. default Sets the modem to default configuration values. model Displays the modem model. serial Displays the serial number of the modem chassis. options Display the internal code for the manufacturing options fitted 106 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation Command Description mods Display the number of modulators installed inside the chassis. (Always 1 for the AMT70 series) demods Display the number of demodulators installed inside the chassis. The value can be 0 or 1 if a demod is fitted. mdate Displays the modem manufacturing date. date Displays the real time clock current date and time ; To set the date and time, the format of the date is as follow; date yyyy.mm.dd-hh:mm:ss Configuration Commands rconf Display the demodulator configuration values. tconf Display the modulator configuration values. iconf Display the interface configuration values. Software / Firmware Version lver Displays the operating system version sver Displays the network management software version tversion Display the modulator software version. rversion Display the demodulator software version (if tfitted) Ethernet Port Commands netconf Display the Ethernet ports configuration values. tsetcfg Set the primary address of the Ethernet port address; The parameters are; tsetcfg ipaddress [www.xxx.yyy.zzz] or tsetcfg netmask [www.xxx.yyy.zzz] or tsetcfg gateway [www.xxx.yyy.zzz] rsetcfg Set the secondary Ethernet port address; The parameters are; tsetcfg ipaddress [www.xxx.yyy.zzz] or tsetcfg netmask [www.xxx.yyy.zzz] or tsetcfg gateway [www.xxx.yyy.zzz] Log Commands listlog List the log file savelog Save the log file for software download clearlog Purge the log file Other Commands uptime Shows the elapsed time since the last reset of the operating system on the NMC card. twelve Displays the power supply voltage measured on the +12 Volt supply. This reading is accurate to approximately ±10%. ledtests Perform LED tests on the front panel bye Exit from the modem shell (Telnet mode) reboot Reboot [ m | all ] Reboot the modem; The option “m’ reset the management card and “ALL reset all the modem cards. After a software upgrade always used the 107 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation Command Description option ALL. 6.1.7 The Interface Commands 6.1.7.1 ASI Interface Commands The ASI interface is fitted on all AMT70 modem on the demodulator card. The TDATA / RDATA commands control the data rate for this interface. 6.1.7.2 RS530 + 1*HSSI interface The commands associated with the RS530+HSSI interface card are as follows: Figure Interface Commands ifmode 42: RS530 + 1*HSSI Commands Summary The modem supports two interface modes; RS485 or single HSSI. For modems equipped with the router option, an extra mode is supported: ETHERNET NOTE: When changing mode (e.g. HSSI to RS-530), the Tx and Rx data rates will default to 5 Mbps. iftdinv Set the interface transmit clock mode. The selections are; INTERNAL | EXTERNAL | RXLOOP | RS530TFD. Control the edge of data interface transmit clock signal that registers the data (TT). This signal can be inverted for compatibility with some OEM equipments; ON | OFF. Control the TX data inversion; ON | OFF. ifrxclk ifrtedgeinv iftdinv Control the selection of RX data receive clock; LOCAL, DTE_TT or DEMOD Control the transmit clock inversion mode; ON | OFF Control the RX data inversion; ON | OFF ifbufmode Control the Doppler buffer algorithm; in AUTO mode the buffer size is controlled by internal algorithms. In MANUAL mode the buffer can be set statically. Set the buffer size when the buffer mode MANUAL is selected. Display the current Doppler buffer usage. Reset (realign) the receive Doppler buffer on the card iftxclock ifttinv ifbufsize ifbufmon ifbufreset ifloopmode Set the data interface loopback mode. The selections are; LINELOCAL, LINEFAR, SYSTEMLOCAL, SYSTEMFAR On this interface the data rate are set by the TDATA / RDATA commands. For more details about all these commands refer to the sections 6 at page 56. 108 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation 6.1.7.3 3*HSSI Interface With this interface installed, the aggregate data rates for all 3 channels are computed automatically. Thus, it is not possible to change data rates using TDATA/RDATA commands. Figure 43: 3*HSSI Commands Summary Interface Commands hssi Used for setting HSSI channel data rates, clock inversion, enable/disable. Specify: [ @1 | @2 | @3 ] immediately after command for channels 1,2 or 3. Data rate: [ TXRATE | RXRATE ] [ 0 - 52000000 ] Clocking inversion: [ TCINV | RCINV ] [ ON | OFF ] Enable / Disable channel: [ TXPORT | RXPORT ] [ ENABLE | DISABLE ] Example commands: hssi @1 rxrate Display HSSI channel 1 Rx data rate hssi @3 tcinv Display HSSI channel 3 Tx clocking inversion hssi @2 rxport Display HSSI channel 2 Rx Enable/disable hssi @1 txrate 5000000Set HSSI channel 1 Tx data rate to 5000000 bps hssi @2 rcinv on Switch HSSI channel 2 Rx clocking inversion on hssi @3 txport disable Disable HSSI channel 3 ifloopmode ifprbs ifprbc ifrperc ifswrev Set / Read interface loopback mode(s). Loopback points are: [ LINELOCAL | LINEFAR | SYSTEMLOCAL | SYSTEMFAR ] Modes: [ ON | OFF ] Enable / Disable PRBS sequence generation. Modes: [ ON | OFF ] Display PRBS Error counters. [ @1 | @2 | @3 ] immediately after command for channels 1,2 or 3. Reset all PRBS Error counters. [ CONFIRM ] for reset. Display interface firmware (FPGA) revision. 109 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation 6.1.7.4 High-performance Gateway (AHPG) Note: Modems equipped with this option will require additional configuration via the Router serial port on the rear of the modem (Labelled CONSOLE). The interface is configured using standard Cisco syntax. Please refer to Appendix D and accompanying documentation “ Advantech IP Gateway Rev.1 ”, for complete command details The modem commands associated with this interface card are as follows: Figure Interface Commands ifmode 44: AHPG Router Commands Summary The modem supports two interface modes; HSSI or ETHERNET In HSSI mode, traffic is passed via the HD-50 (SCSI-style) connector. In ETHERNET mode, traffic is via the RJ-45 (Ethernet) ports. Router configuration Parameters are detailed in accompanying document “Advantech IP Gateway R.1” NOTE: When changing mode (e.g. HSSI to RS-530), the Tx and Rx data rates will default to 5 Mbps. iftdinv Set the interface transmit clock mode. The selections are; INTERNAL | EXTERNAL | RXLOOP | RS530TFD. Control the edge of data interface transmit clock signal that registers the data (TT). This signal can be inverted for compatibility with some OEM equipments; ON | OFF. Control the TX data inversion; ON | OFF. ifrxclk ifrtedgeinv iftdinv Control the selection of RX data receive clock; LOCAL, DTE_TT or DEMOD Control the transmit clock inversion mode; ON | OFF Control the RX data inversion; ON | OFF ifbufmode Control the Doppler buffer algorithm; in AUTO mode the buffer size is controlled by internal algorithms. In MANUAL mode the buffer can be set statically. Set the buffer size when the buffer mode MANUAL is selected. Display the current Doppler buffer usage. Reset (realign) the receive Doppler buffer on the card iftxclock ifttinv ifbufsize ifbufmon ifbufreset ifloopmode Set the data interface loopback mode. The selections are; LINELOCAL, LINEFAR, SYSTEMLOCAL, SYSTEMFAR On this interface the data rate are set by the TDATA / RDATA commands. 110 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation CHAPTER 7 USING THE RS-485 PORT It is recommended that Chapter 3 and Chapter 5 be reviewed to understand the operational features of this modem prior to setting up the modem. 7.1 The RS-485 Control Commands The mccontrol command defines which network management application controls the port. The format of the command MCCONTROL is as follows; MCCONTROL [ COMMAND | PACKET | NONE ] The MCCONTROL command parameters are as follows; COMMAND: In this mode the modem “command” task controls the port. This ASCII protocol is typically used by a PC to control multiple modems (up to 16) using an RS-485 bus cabling. This legacy protocol used by the SL-2048™ product is still supported for upward compatibility. The command mode is supported by all modem types. This protocol is described in Paragraph 7.2 . PACKET: The packet protocol application controls the RS-485 port. This application is described in Paragraph 7.3. NONE: In this mode the RS-485 is unassigned to any control applications. This is the default manufacturing mode. The RS-485 port can be set up using either the active front panel (Chapter 4) or from the RS-232 interface (Chapter 5). 7.2 The Command Mode The AMT-70 modem is upward compatible and still supports the “Addressing Mode” protocol that was used by the SL-2048™ legacy modems. With this protocol a client PC can send ASCII requests to one or more modems on an RS-485 bus using character command mode. To command a modem on the RS-485 bus, the command must be prefaced with the address 1-255, then a SPACE. Leading zeros for the address are not required. For the request the address and command is not be echoed back to the user. The return prompt after the message is received indicates which modem replied. EXAMPLE:

Ex: 023 TBPSK ON Returns: AMT-70 023 ON 111 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation The AMT-70 modem supports a fast binary protocol through the back-panel RS-485 interface used to control the modem from a client application running on a master workstation. The client station can be based on Windows or Linux. The modem acts as a server application and executes the configuration/monitoring query from this station. The client application can control the following components on the AMT-73L modem: The modulator The demodulator The data interface card The BUC/LNB units (not required for AMT-73L) 7.3 The Packet Protocol The packet protocol allows a client application (typically running on a master PC) to control multiple clients modems using a binary exchange protocol. The master unit send the requests on a multi-drop RS-485 cable7 to the slave modems The master modem always controls the transmit channel (TX) and the slave modems exchange the control of the (RX) channel on the bus. In a typical configuration, the master modem sends 10 bytes binary requests to one of several (slave) modems on a network. These requests can gather information (GET request) or configure the slave modems (SET requests). The tributary modems are referenced by a specific address. This address is defined by the MCADD command. A maximum of 13 modems can be controlled by one master station. When one of the tributary modems recognizes his address in the frame header, the request is processed and it takes control of the RS-485 bus (RX side) for sending the response. The bus is after frees up. The master continues to poll alternatively (in round-robin mode) all slaves on the bus. This packet mode is supported when customer specific applications are required. This mode is a complement to the CLI (Serial / Telnet) and SNMP modes. The detailed packet protocol specifications are documented in the reference manual; AMT-70 Series; Packet Protocol Specification, AdvantechAMT 2005 These specifications describe in detail the protocol handshaking and the request/response binary frame structure. This document is available upon request from your customer support. 7 The RS485 pinout for the AMT70/73L modems is described at page 119. 112 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation CHAPTER 8 CABLES AND PIN-OUTS 8.1 Rear Panel Connector Arrangements The connector arrangements for the AMT-70L and AMT-73L are provided in the following figures. P2 J1 J2 P1 P5 P3 P4 J3 P6 P8 P7 J5 J6 Figure 45: Back Panel Connectors for AMT-70 Back Panel Connector Name Description Connector Type J1 RF IN (2) Type F (female) J2 RF IN (1) Type F (female) J3 ASI OUTPUT BNC (female) J4 EXT REF BNC (female) (Optional) J5 ASI INPUT BNC (female) J6 MOD RF OUT Type N (female) P1 DEMOD ETHERNET RJ-45 P2 RS-530 25-Pin D P3 HSSI Subminiature 50-Pin male P4 REDUNDANCY 15-PinD P5 ALARMS 15-PinD P6 MOD/DEMOD ETHERNET RJ-45 P7 RS-232 (M&C) 9-PinD P8 RS-485 (M&C) 9-PinD Figure 46: Back Panel Connectors for AMT-73L 113 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation RS-422/449 Data Interface J8 AC Input L Band Input J2 Gnd Lug Demod 10/100BaseT M&C10 J10 HSSI Data Interface J18 Ext CLK J14 Back Panel Connector Name Redundancy J7 Description L Band Output J1 RS-485 M&C J13 Alarms J6 Mod/Demod 10/100BaseT M&C J9 RS-232 M&C J11 Connector Type J1 L Band Output TNC (female) J2 L Band Input TNC (female) J3 AC Power In IEC-320 J6 Alarms 15 Pin D J7 Redundancy 15 Pin D J8 RIA/TIA 449/422 37 Pin D J9 Demodulator Ethernet M&C RJ-45 J10 Mod/Demod Ethernet M&C RJ-45 J11 RS-232 M&C DB-9 (female) J13 RS-485 M&C DB-9 (female) J14 External Clock BNC (female) J18 HSSI Subminiature 50-Pin male 8.2 RS-442/449 to RS-530 Adapter Cable Using an AMT-70 with devices that have an RS-422/RS-449 interface (such as a BER tester) requires an adapter cable. Although the RS-530 and RS-422/RS-449 interfaces are electrically identical, they have different connectors. Use a cable with the pin-outs as listed in the figure below; Figure 47: TS-422/RS-449 to RS-530 Adapter Cable Pin-Out RS-422/RS-449 Pin RS-422/RS-449 Signal Source RS-530 Pin P1-17 TT-A DTE P1-35 TT-B DTE P2-24 P2-11 P1-4 SD-A DTE P2-2 P1-22 SD-B DTE P2-14 114 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation RS-422/RS-449 Pin RS-422/RS-449 Signal Source RS-530 Pin P1-5 ST-A DCE P1-23 ST-B DCE P2-15 P2-12 P1-7 RS-A DTE P2-4 P1-25 RS-B DTE P2-19 P1-9 CS-A DCE P2-5 P1-27 CS-B DCE P1-1 Shield P2-13 P2-1 P1-19 Signal Ground P1-13 RR-A P2-7 P1-31 RR-B DCE P2-10 P1-11 DM-A DCE P2-6 P1-29 DM-B DCE P2-22 P1-6 RD-A DCE P2-3 P1-24 RD-B DCE P2-16 DCE P2-8 P1-8 RT-A DCE P2-17 P1-26 RT-B DCE P2-9 Notes: P1 is a male DB-37 connector P2 is a male DB-25 connector. Wire A/B pairs use # 28 AWG twisted pair. 8.3 RS-422/449 to RS-530 Y-Cable If a Y-type cable is required to go from RS-422/RS-449 to RS-530, use the pin-outs listed in the figure below. Figure 48: RS-422/RS-449 to RS-530 Y-Cable Pin-Outs RS-422/RS-449 Pin RS-422/RS-449 Signal Source DTE RS-530 Pin P1-17 TT-A P2-24 P1-35 TT-B DTE P2-11 P1-4 SD-A DTE P2-2 P1-22 SD-B DTE P2-14 P1-5 ST-A DCE P2-15 P1-23 ST-B DCE P2-12 P1-7 RS-A DTE P2-4 P1-25 RS-B DTE P2-19 P1-9 CS-A DCE P2-5 P1-27 CS-B DCE P1-1 Shield P2-1 P1-1 Shield P3-1 P1-19 Signal Ground P2-7 P1-19 Signal Ground P1-13 RR-A DCE P3-8 P1-31 RR-B DCE P3-10 P1-11 DM-A DCE P3-6 P1-29 DM-B DCE P3-22 P1-6 RD-A DCE P3-3 P1-24 RD-B DCE P3-16 P2-13 P3-7 115 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation RS-422/RS-449 Pin RS-422/RS-449 Signal Source RS-530 Pin P1-8 RT-A DCE P3-17 P1-26 RT-B DCE P3-9 Notes: P1 is a male DB-37 connector that connects to the BERT. P2 is a male DB-25 connector that connects to the Modulator. P3 is a male DB-25 connector that connects to the Demodulator. Wire A/B pairs using # 28 AWG twisted pair. 8.4 RS-530 Data Interface Pin-Outs (AMT-70) The 25-pin D connector (labeled P2 of the AMT-70) TX/RX DATA RS-530 on the rear panel has the pin-outs listed in the figure below. Figure 49: RS-530 Data Interface Pin-Outs DB-25 Pin Number Pin 2 Pin 14 Pin 24 Pin 11 Pin 15 Pin 12 Pin 5 Pin 13 Pin 4 Pin 19 Pin 3 Pin 16 Pin 17 Pin 9 Pin 6 Pin 22 Pin 8 Pin 10 Pin 7 Pin 25 Pin 1 RS-530 Name BA-A BA-B DA-A DA-B DB-A DB-B CB-A CB-B CA-A CA-B BB-A BB-B DD-A DD-B CC-A CC-B CF-A CF-B GND TM SHIELD Common Name Description DIRECTION TD-A TD-B SCTE-A SCTE-B SCT-A SCT-B CTS-A CTS-B RTS-A RTS-B RD-A RD-B RT-A RT-B DCE Ready-A DCE Ready-B RLSD-A RLSD-B GND -12 V SHIELD Transmit Data (A) Transmit Data (B) Transmit Signal Element Timing DTE (A) Transmit Signal Element Timing DTE (B) Transmit Signal Element Timing DCE (A) Transmit Signal Element Timing DCE (B) Clear to Send (A) Clear to Send (B) Request to Send (A) Request to Send (B) Receive Data (A) Receive Data (B) Received Signal Element Timing DCE (A) Received Signal Element Timing DCE (B) DCE Ready-A DCE Ready-B Received Line Signal Detect (A) Received Line Signal Detect (B) GND Test Mode GND To Modem To Modem To Modem To Modem From Modem From Modem From Modem From Modem To Modem To Modem From Modem From Modem From Modem From Modem From Modem From Modem From Modem From Modem From Modem From Modem 116 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation 8.5 HSSI Connector Pin-Outs The HSSI cable pin-outs (P3 on AMT-70 and J18 on the AMT-73L) are as follows; Figure 50: HSSI Data Interface Pin-Outs Pin # (+ side) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14-18 19 20-23 24 Pin # (- side) 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39-43 44 45-48 49 SC RT DSR RD LC ST SC DTR TT LA SD LB SG Direction DTE-DCE SG --<-. <-. <-. <-. <--.-> .-> .-> .-> .-> --.-> --- Signal Name Signal common Receive Timing DCE Available Receive Data Loopback Circuit C Transmit Signal Element Timing Signal Ground DTE Ready Transmit Signal Element Timing Loopback Circuit A Send Data Loopback Circuit B Signal Ground 5 Ancillary to DCE Signal Ground 4 Ancillary from DCE Test Mode 8.6 RJ-45 Ethernet M&C Connector Pin-Outs The 10/100BaseT Ethernet M&C connection utilizes a RJ-45 connector, as shown in the following figure, which also depicts the arrangement of the pins, looking into the connector. There are two Ethernet connectors, one for the demodulator only (P1 on the AMT-70 and J10 on the AMT-73L) and one for the modulator and demodulator (P6 on the AMT-70 and J9 on the AMT-73L). Use of the demodulator only Ethernet port is intended for factory testing and updating demodulator software changes. The modulator and demodulator Ethernet port should be used for communications with the modem during normal usage. Figure 51: Ethernet RJ-45 Connector Pin-Outs RJ-45 Pin Number Description 1 TX + White w/Orange 2 TX - Orange 6 3 RX + White w/Green Crossover Cable Pins 1 3 Blue 4 White w/Blue 5 6 Wire Color Codes RX - Green 7 White w/Brown 8 Brown 2 117 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation 8.7 RJ-45 Ethernet IP Router Connector Pin-Outs (AMT-73L) AMT-70 Modems may be optionally supplied with an IP router, Dual-port IP router (HPIP), FRAD (Frame Relay Access Device) and bridge. With this option, an external router is not required. For units equipped with IP data routing via a single port, an RJ-45 connector (JB) on the rear panel provides access to the Ethernet data port. The pinout for JB is detailed in section 0 and Figure 51. For units equipped with the HPIP dual port IP router, RJ-45 connectors ETH0 and ETH1 on the rear panel provides this access. The pinout for these ports is identical and also detailed in section 0 and Figure 51. 8.8 RS-232 Connector Pin-Outs The figure below lists the pin-outs of the 9-pin D connector (labeled P7 on the AMT-70, J11 on the AMT-73L): Figure 52: RS-232 Connector Pin-Outs DB-9 Pin Number Description Pin 1 Not Used Pin 2 Tx Data Pin 3 Rx Data Pin 4 Not Used Pin 5 Ground Pin 6 Not Used Pin 7 Not Used Pin 8 Not Used Pin 9 +5 VDC @ 100 mA Note: Some PCs do not respond well to the +5 VDC applied to pin 9. 8.9 RS-232 Null Modem Cable Assembly The figure below lists the pin-outs of a cable assembly that can connect the AMT-70 M&C port to another RS232 DCE port. The loopback handshaking listed is not required for the AMT-70 modem, but may be required for the other port. Figure 53: RS-232 Null Modem Connector Pin-Outs DB-9 Pin Number Description AMT-70 Pin Number Pin 1 RLSD to Pin 4 and 6 Pin 2 TX/RX Data Pin 3 Pin 3 RX/TX Data Pin 2 Pin 4 DTR to Pin 1 and 6 Pin 5 Ground Pin 6 DSR to Pin 1 and 4 Pin 7 RTS to Pin 8 Pin 8 CTS to Pin 7 Pin 9 Not Used Pin 5 118 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation 8.10 RS-485 Connector Pin-Outs The figure below, lists the pin-outs of the 9-pin D connector (P8 for AMT-70; J13 for AMT-73L): Figure 54: RS-485 Connectors Pin-Outs DB-9 Pin Number AMT70 AMT73L Pin 1 Signal Ground RS-485 TX + Pin 2 Power Detector - Signal Ground Pin 3 Not Used Signal Ground Pin 4 RS-485 TX - Signal Ground Pin 5 RS-485 TX + Signal Ground Pin 6 Power detector + RS-485 TX - Pin 7 Not Used Signal Ground Pin 8*** RS-485 RX + RS-485 RX + Pin 9*** RS-485 RX - RS-485 RX - *** For AMT70/73L Pins 8 and 9 are for 2-wire operation. Pins 4, 5, 8, and 9 are for 4-wire operation. 8.11 EIA/TIA-449 AMT-73L Connector Pin-Outs The figure below, lists the pin-outs of the 37-pin D connector (labeled J8 on AMT-73L) on the rear panel. Figure 55: EIA/TIA-449 Connector Pin-Outs PIN NUMBER 4 22 6 24 7 25 9 27 11 29 12 30 13 31 17 35 5 23 8 26 10 1 19 37 20 33 SIGNAL NAME SD A SD B RD A RD B RTS A RTS B CTS A CTS B DSR A DSR B DTR A DTR B Recvd Line Signal Det Recvd Line Signal Det TT A TT B ST A ST B RT A RT B LL GND ( Shield ) GND ( Shield ) SC RC SQ COMMENT ( Signal Direction ) Send Data + to DCE ( Modem ) Send Data - to DCE ( Modem ) Receive Data + from Modem Receive Data - from Modem Request To Send + to Modem Request To Send - to Modem Clear To Send + from Modem Clear To Send - from Modem DSR + means ( from ) Modem is Ready DSR - means ( from ) Modem is Ready Data Term Ready + to Modem Data Term Ready - to Modem From Simple Interface From Simple Interface Transmit Timing + from Terminal to Modem Transmit Timing - from Terminal to Modem Send Timing + from Modem to Terminal Send Timing - from Modem to Terminal Receive Timing + from Modem to Terminal Receive Timing - from Modem to Terminal Local LoopBack from Terminal to Modem Shield is connect to Chassis GND Shield is connect to Chassis GND Send Common Receive Common Signal Quality 119 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation SIGNAL NAME PIN NUMBER 16 2 32 36 15 16 14 18 SR SI SS SB IC SF RL TM COMMENT ( Signal Direction ) Signal Freq Select Signal Rate Indicator Select Standby Standby Indicator Ring Indicator Select Transmit Freq Remote LoopBack Test Indicator 8.12 RJ-45 RS232 Pin-Out (AMT-73L) For units equipped with IP data routing, located at Port JA on the rear of the modem is an RJ-45 connector carrying RS-232 electrical signals. This port is used for controlling the router. The RJ-45 connector diagram is shown in Figure 51. The wiring is specified below. For more information regarding control of the router, please refer to the router manual titled ‘Communication Processor’. RJ-45 Pin Number Description 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 CTS DTR TxD GND GND RxD DSR RTS 8.13 Front panel RJ-11 RS232 Pin-Out (AMT-70/75) Units equipped with 3 x HSSI ports and certain units equipped with IP data ports do not have a rear RS-232 M&C connection. Instead, this connection is routed to a front panel RJ-11 socket. The pinout for the socket is shown in the following table. RJ-11 Pin Number Description 1 2 3 4 5 6 GND RX TX -COM +5V 120 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation 8.14 Front panel RJ-11 to PC 9-pin RS-232 Adapter cable For units equipped with the front panel RJ-11 port are shipped with a 6 foot RJ-11 to RS-232 adapter cable, Advantech Part # 26A-300MCU-601. The cable pinout is shown in the following table. RJ-11 Pin Description *RS-232 pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 GND RX TX -COM +5V 5 3 2 6 1 9 * All other RS-232 pins not described are No Connect. 8.15 SSPB/Modem Cabling Requirements The table below describes the cable assembly necessary to establish communications from the AMT-70 modem and the AdvantechAMT SSPBs (BUC). The 9-pin D connector is a male and is not supplied. The 17-pin circular connector is a female and is supplied with the SSPBs. Figure 56: Cable pin-outs between AMT-70 and AdvantechAMT C & Ku band 9 PIN D CONNECTOR Pin 1 17 PIN CIRCULAR CONNECTOR SIGNAL DESCRIPTION Pin M Signal Ground Pin 8 Pin D RS485 (+) Pin 9 Pin C RS485 (-) 121 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation 8.16 Alarms Connector Description The modem provides 3 Form-C contact (relay) outputs for FAULT indication on the Modulator board which includes a FAULT from the Demodulator board (P5 - AMT-70, J6 - AMT-73L). One alarm relay set is undefined. The provided signals are as follows: Figure 57: Pin-outs for alarm connector Pin No. SIGNAL DESCRIPTION 1 (Undefined) Relay 1 NO 2 (Undefined) Relay 1 NC 3 Demodulator Fault Common 4 Modulator Fault NO 5 Modulator Fault NC 6-8 N/C (not connected) 9 (Undefined) Relay 1 Common 10 Demodulator Fault NO 11 Demodulator Fault NC 12 Modulator Fault Common 13-15 N/C (not connected) The Modulator alarm will activate for the following conditions: • AC Power Fail • ASI Input Failure due to; o ASI signal not present o MPEG Sync Marks not correct o ASI frequency outside +500ppm tolerance The Demodulator alarm will activate for the following conditions: • Demodulator lost of any Timing, Carrier, or FEC Lock • Demodulator communications not responding 8.17 L-Band Transmit Cable The recommended cable used to connect the modulator output to the BUC is available from Times Microwave Systems. The part number of the bulk cable is LMR-600DB. The assembly number of a finished cable is AE50520-XXX where XXX specifies the cable length in feet. This cable has male type-N connectors at each end. The cable and its connectors have an impedance of 50 Ω. 8.18 L-Band Receive Cable There are many types of coaxial cables that can be used to connect the LNB/BDC to the demodulator input. The appropriate cable is dependent on many factors, including the gain in the LNB and BDC/LNA, and the distance between the LNB or BDC and the input to the demodulator. The cable and its connectors should have impedance of 75 Ω. One such cable is the 5916 or 5916R cable supplied by CommScope. It is an RG11 type cable that has an RF loss of 4.4 dB @ 950 MHz and 6.33 dB @ 2150 MHz per 100 ft, and a DC resistance of 1.5 Ω per 100 ft. Connectors for this cable are available from Gilbert Engineering. 122 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation 8.19 DB15 – DB15 – Switch Cable The following connection information is provided for reference purposes. Figure 58: DB15-DB15-Redundancy Switch Adapter Cable Pin-Outs DB15 (A) DB15 (B) RF SWITCH 1 2 AV1 RF SW Drive, unit A Note 2 1 AV2 RF SW Drive, unit B 3 3 COM 6 14 -- Future Use 7 13 -- Future Use 8 15 -- 9 9 +C 11 12 1 RF Relay O/P NC 12 11 2 RF Relay O/P NO 13 7 -- Future Use 14 6 -- Future Use 15 8 -- A --> B Redundancy Signal Ground B --> A Redundancy RF SW +12V 123 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation CHAPTER 9 TURBO CODING DETAILS A basic understanding in Turbo Product Coding is followed by the specific AMT-70 Turbo Product Code details. 9.1 Turbo Product Code Overview CRC Insert Scrambler TPC Encoder Framer When data is encoded using Turbo Product Codes, it passes through four stages. First, a cyclic redundancy check-word (CRC) is inserted into the uncoded data. This is then scrambled and then Turbo encoded. Finally, framing marks are inserted into the coded data to enable decoding. Turbo Product Codes are either two- or three-dimensional codes. Blocks of data are formed into 2D or 3D arrays. The raw data is then encoded in each axis, using the basic Hamming or Parity codes. 57 bits In this case, a 2D code is being applied, so the uncoded data is formed into a square 2D array. In this case, the array of uncoded data is 57 x 57 = 3249 bits in size. 57 bits Uncoded Data ECC Bits The component code is then applied first over one axis. This adds 7 error correction-coding (ECC) bits to each row of data. Uncoded Data 64 bits 124 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation ECC Bits Uncoded Data 64 bits The second axis is now encoded using the appropriate component code Note that the ECC bits generated by the first encoding pass are in turn protected. This results in an encoded block of 64 x 64 = 4096 bits. The variety of available TPC codes is enormous: it is possible to use different component codes, different coded block (array) sizes, to shorten the code by removing planes, rows, or individual bits, and to apply an additional ‘enhanced’ coding pass. As a result, it is necessary to uniquely identify the code. The convention for this is to describe each axis in terms of component code, uncoded and coded block sizes. So the code above can be uniquely described as: eH(64, 57)eH(64, 57) Where each axis (X, then Y) is an extended Hamming (eH) component code encoding 57 bits to produce 64 bits. 9.2 AMT7X family TPC Overview The AMT-7x family of products supports the following codes: eH (32, 26) eH (32,26) eH (16,11) – This is a 3D code with a 16384-bit block size, made up of three extended Hamming codes. eH (64, 57) eH (64, 57) P (4,3) – Another 3D/16384-bit code. In this case, the Z-axis code is a parity-only code. eH (64, 57) eH (64, 56) – This is a 2D 4096-bit code. It differs from the example because it is shortened in the Y-axis to enable enhanced coding. eH (128, 120) eH (128, 119) – A 2D enhanced code as the previous, however with the larger 16384 bit block size. eH (128, 120) P (128, 126) – Similar to the previous code, however using a parity-only code in the Y-axis. And the following two compatible (Radyne / Comtech) codes are implemented Rate ¾ - which is an exact 0.75 rate. It is a 4k bit block size and has no CRC Rate 7/8 – an exact 0.875 rate. It is a 16k bit block size and has CRC. 9.2.1 CRCs and Scrambling In all cases, a CRC is inserted into the uncoded data stream prior to encoding to determine the presence of block errors after decode. The CRC word used is the CRC-32B algorithm. This produces a 32-bit word that is inserted at the end of the uncoded data block. 125 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation In some cases, where the uncoded block size does not exactly line up on a byte-boundary, a number of padding bits are inserted after the CRC. They are set to zero. Once the CRC is inserted, the uncoded data is then always scrambled. This does not add or remove data from the stream, merely exclusive-ORs it with a pseudo-random binary sequence that can be removed in the decoder. 9.2.2 Framing In order that the decoder can detect the start of an encoded data block, it is necessary to insert framing marks around (and within) the encoded data. It is insufficient to simply mark the start of an encoded block, given the large block sizes. Therefore, additional framing marks are inserted into the encoded data at regular intervals to aid in this process. The start of frame marks is distinguished by being the inverted form of the sync mark. The encoded 2D block looks thus: ISM FSM ECC Bits Uncoded Data CRC FSM In this case, there are three evenly spaced sync marks per block, the first of which is inverted to indicate the start of the frame. For all codes, the sync mark is 8-bits long (with value 0xE2), with 128 bytes of encoded data between them. The number of marks varies with the block size: for 16384 bit codes, the block contains 16 marks (1 inverted); for the 4096-bit code, there are only four marks (1 inverted as before). 9.2.3 Calculating the Code Rate The code rate is the ratio of raw input data size (without CRC etc.) over the total encoded and framed data size. The total encoded data size in bits E is dependent on the block size and the framing: E bits = TPCBlockSize + ( NumberOfSyncMarks × 8) For 16k blocks, the basic block size is 16384 bits; to which must be added 16 bytes (128 bits) of sync mark, making a total of 16512 bits. For 4k blocks, the basic block size is 4096 bits with 4 bytes (32 bits) of sync mark, making a total of 4128 bits. The unencoded data size is harder to calculate. First, the uncoded block size is calculated from the product of uncoded elements of the code. Then, deduct 32 bits for the CRC. It is then necessary to determine if any padding is required, since the raw data must be in bytes. 126 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation The calculated uncoded size is thus reduced to the nearest multiple of 8. ⎛ ((U ×UY ×U z ) − 32) ⎞ Ubits = int⎜ X ⎟ ×8 8 ⎝ ⎠ In 2D cases, Uz is 1. The code rate is then determined as the ratio of the two values: CodeRate = For each of the supported code, the rates are: Code Rate TPC Code TX eH(32, 26) eH(32,26) eH(16,11) U E Eb/No (10 Mbps data rate & 10-7 BER) QPSK 8PSK 16QAM 0.44815891 TPC16K-2/5 2.4 dB eH(64, 57) eH(64, 57) P(4,3) 0.58817829 TPC16K-3/5 2.9 dB 5.8 eH(128, 120) eH(128, 119) 0.86288760 TPC16K-8/9 4.2 dB 7.3 8.3 eH(128, 120) P(128, 126) 0.91375969 TPC16K-19/20 5.1 dB 8.6 9.6 Figure 59: eTPC Code Rates and Eb/No Values for AMT70 & 73 Eb/No (10 Mbps data rate & 10-7 BER) QPSK 8PSK 16QAM Code Rate TPC Code TX TPC Code RX eH(64, 57) eH(64, 57) P(4,3) 9715/16512 TPC16K3/5 TPC70 3/5 12 eH(64,57)eH(63,56)+ 3160/4128 TPC 4K4/5 TPC70 4/5 14 eH(128, 120) eH(128, 119) 14248/16512 TPC16K8/9 TPC70 8/9 22 eH(128, 120) P(128, 126) 15088/16512 TPC16K19/20 TPC70 19/20 26 Figure 60 : eTPC Code rates and Eb/No Values for AMT75 The code rate can then be used to calculate the transmitted symbol rate from the input bit rate (and visa versa): CodeRate × Modulationbits / symbol = BitRatebits / s BaudRatesymbols / s The ratio of the raw data (base-band) bit rate and the transmitted symbol rate is the product of the code rate and the modulation order in bits/symbol: BPSK has order 1; QPSK and Offset QPSK have order 2; 8PSK has order 3 and 16QAM order 4. 127 Max bitrate Mb/S AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation 3rd Party TPC Familes 9.3 The follow ing eTPC rates have been interoperably Modems. tested w ith leading 3 rd Party Eb/No (10 Mbps data rate & 10-7 BER) QPSK 8PSK 16QAM Code Rate TPC Code TX TPC Code RX (28,22)(32,26)(4,3) 12012/25168 NA TPC 16k 1/2 (64,57)(46,39) 2223/2964 TPC-4k 3/4 TPC-4k 3/4 3.9 dB 7.0 7.9 (128,120)(128,120) 14280/16320 TPC-16k 7/8 TPC-16k 7/8 4.2 dB 7.3 8.3 (64,63)(62,61)+ 3808/4032 NA TPC 4K 19/20 Figure 61 3rd Party eTPC code rates and Eb/No for AMT70 Code Eb/No (10 Mbps data rate & 10-7 BER) QPSK 8PSK 16QAM Rate TPC Code TX TPC Code RX AMT75 Max Bitrate Mb/S (28,22)(32,26)(4,3) 12012/25168 N/A TPC600 1/2 10 (64,57)(46,39) 2223/2964 TPC4K3/4 TPC600 3/4 13 (128,120)(128,120) 14280/16320 TPC 16K 7/8 TPC600 7/8 29 (64,63)(62,61)+ 3808/4032 N/A TPC600 19/20 24 Figure 62 3rd Party eTPC code rates and Eb/No for AMT75 The method of scrambling can be either Synchronous or V35. 128 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation CHAPTER 10 BUC AND ADVANTECH SSPB The purpose of this chapter is to provide the procedures for operating the AMT-70 satellite modem with the AdvantechAMT BUC and the AdvantechAMT SSPB. P 10.1 SSPB (BUC) Interface Connections 1. Connect BUC WR75 waveguide output to a suitable load. The Ortho Mode Transducer (OMT) properly mounted to antenna or power attenuator will qualify as a suitable load. 2. Set the BUC power OFF using the command BUCPOWER OFF. 3. Connect AMT-70 (J6) to BUC (IFL) using low-loss 50-Ohm cable with type N (male) connectors at each end. The cable loss must not exceed 12.5 dB at 2000 MHz. Cable centre conductor DC resistance (end to end) must not exceed 0.5 Ω. For cable runs up to 100 meters, useLMR-600 or equivalent. 4. Connect AMT-70 (J5) to BUC (RS-485) using twisted pair cable.The connector supplied with the AdvantechAMT SSPB is used at one end and a 9-pin male D connector at the other. 10.2 LNB Interface Connections 1. Connect LNB WR75 waveguide input to OMT output. 2. Set the LNB power OFF using the command LNBPOWER OFF. 3. Connect LNB output to AMT-70 (J1) using low-loss 75-Ohm cable with type F (male) connectors at each end. Cable loss must not exceed 25 dB at 2150 MHz. 10.3 RS-232 M&C Interface Connections Connect M&C RS-232 (P8) interface to a PC with available RS-232 interface. 10.4 AMT-70 Modem Configuration 1. Refer to AMT-70 manual regarding the setting of the modulator parameters. 2. Use the following formula to determine the modulator IF frequency based from upon the transmit frequency: (BUC TX frequency) - (BUC LO 13.05 GHz) = Modulator IF carrier frequency. Example for the desired TX frequency of 14.250 GHz: 14.250 - 13.050 = 1200 MHz. 3. Refer to AMT-70 manual regarding the setting of demodulator parameters. 4. Use the following formula to determine demodulator IF frequency based upon the receive frequency from the satellite: RX frequency – LNB LO frequency = IF 129 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation 10.5 TX Carrier Enable 1. Double-check modulator IF carrier frequency to insure proper TX frequency. 2. Determine desired TX output level from BUC. 3. Determine modulator output level based upon following formula: (TX BUC dBm) – (IF to RF BUC gain dB)- (Cable Loss dB) = Modulator carrier level. Example: 4 Watts = +36 dBm, BUC gain = 56 dB, cable loss 6 dB. 36 dBm – 56 dB – 6 dB = -26 dBm 4. As in the above example, set modulator output level using M&C command “TLEVEL -26”. 5. Double-check BUC output for proper termination. 6. Using M&C command “TREF ON”, to enable 10 MHz. 7. Set the AMT-70 BUC power to ON using the BUCPOWER ON command. Figure 63: Test Diagram for SSPB and LNB M&C Terminal Interface RF Input IBM Compatible 75 Ohm Coax 950 - 1450 MHz Connectors Type F(female) Caution: +24 or +48 VDC is present on J1 center conductor. Use BUC power switch (SW1) or DC block to prevent damage to test equipment. SW1 TX/RX DATA J1 RS-232 M&C Interface. Refer To SL-2048 Manual for Installation and Operation. M&C RS-232 J2 M&C RS485 J3 Caution: +20 VDC is present on J5 center conductor. Use LNB power switch (SW2) or DC block to prevent damage to test equipment. SW2 J5 RS-530 BUC PWR LNB P1 AC Power RS-485 Connector (Provided) LNB PWR RF Output SL-2048 Rear Panel 50 Ohm Coax 950 - 1450 MHz Connectors Type N(male) Figure D1. Test Diagram 1 Refer to SL-2048 and BUC/SSPB Manuals for Pin Assignments SierraCom BUC or Advantech SSPB L Band Connector Type N (female) Caution: RF Output must be properly terminated to prevent damage to BUC/SSPB. Do not use this LNB connector. RX Carrier Acquisition 1. Set the LNB power to ON using the lnbpower ON command. 2. Use M&C command “rspinv to disable the receive Spectrum Invert feature. 3. Use M&C command “rsweep 32”, to enable demodulator sweep at +/- 32 kHz. 4. To check for carrier acquisition, use AMT-70 front panel RX Lock indicator to detect lock. 130 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation CHAPTER 11 REDUNDANCY The AMT-70 modem can be purchased with additional functionality that facilitates a one-for-one (1:1) redundancy system. The redundancy feature is installed at manufacturing of the modem. This section describes how to set up your hardware and configure the redundancy system to best suit your needs. 11.1 Hardware Installation Your AMT-70 Redundancy kit is one of two variants: ASI (Asynchronous Serial Interface) or combination RS-530 and HSSI (High Speed Serial Interface). The ASI kit ships with a redundnacy bracket to be fitted near the rear of the modems, detailed in section 11.1.1. The RS-530/HSSI kit ships with a larger 1U chassis to be fitted ideally below or between the 1:1 modem chassis. This is detailed in section 11.1.2. If you have the HSSI / RS-530 kit, skip to section 11.1.2. 11.1.1 ASI Interface The redundancy hardware kit consists of the following: Rack-mount bracket with RF splitter and switch pre-mounted; 2 x N-Type-to-SMA Cables (P/N 26A-200ABC-001 and 26A-200ABC-201) 2 x BNC-to-BNC Cables (P/N 26A-200ABC-001 and 26A-200ABC-101) Wire harness assembly (P/N 26A-200ABC-301) The two AMT-70 chassis should be placed into a rack mount. The rack-mount bracket is mounted ideally between the two chassis at the rear of the modem. You may find it best to leave a 1-2U shelf gap (but no more) between the modems in order to accommodate the rack mount bracket easily with the units. The entire system is illustrated in Figure 64 . Note that the gap between the units is greatly exaggerated in order to present the connections in a clearer manner. The DATA (ASI) input is ‘split’ to the 2 units. Using the 2 BNC-to-BNC cables (P/N 26A-200ABC-001 and 26A-200ABC-101) connect from positions 1 and 2 on the splitter to the ASI ports (P7) on each unit. One of the cables is longer, providing for the bracket to be closer to one of the units than the other if necessary. The Wire harness assembly (P/N 26A-200ABC-301) has two DB-15 connectors and is usually prewired to the RF switch. If this is not the case, consult Chapter 5 for wiring details. Connect DB-15 ends to the P4 interfaces on each chassis. The Wire harness assembly is hard-coded, meaning one end of the DB-15 associates with one ‘active path’ on the RF switch and only this path. The DB-15s have been marked ‘A’ and ‘B’, meaning that the unit connected to the ‘A’ end will be on the ‘1’ path for the RF switch, and ‘B’ on the ‘2’ path. The RF switch is labeled 1—C—2. Using the N-toSMA cables (P/N 26A-200ABC-001 and 26A-200ABC-201), connect chassis ‘A’ to position ‘1’ on the switch and chassis ‘B’ to position ‘2’. 131 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation J5 (OUT) P7 (ASI) Shelf A P4 SWITCH (OUT) SPLITTER (IN) RACK-MOUNT BRACKET RF OUT DATA IN Shelf B Figure 64: Redundancy Connections: ASI interface as Data Input Skip to section 11.2 Software Configuration. 132 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation 11.1.2 RS-530 / HSSI interface The core redundancy hardware kit consists of the following: • 1U rack mounted redunancy shelf (see below for appropriate Part Number) • 2 x 15-Pin D-Sub M-M redundancy signalling cables (P/N 26A-400805-D01) • 2 x AC Power Supply cables with North American plugs (P/N 670-000380-001) • 2 x 25-Pin D-Sub M-M cables for RS-530 interface (P/N 26A-400805-E01) i.e. the above section inventory is common to ALL 1:1 RS-530/HSSI kits. The redundancy chassis comes with your choice of RF interface, one of 3 variants: • BNC interface (Kit P/N 19A-250000-000) • TNC interface (Kit P/N 19A-250000-100) • F in / N out interface (Kit P/N 19A-250000-200) For the BNC variant, the following are supplied: • Core redundancy kit, as described at the top • Redundancy shelf with BNC I/O (P/N 16A-250000-000) • 4 x BNC-M to BNC-M cables (P/N 26A-100809-I01) For the TNC variant, the following are supplied: • Core redundancy kit, as described at the top • Redunancy shelf with TNC I/O (P/N 16A-250000-100) • 4 x TNC-M to TNC-M cables (P/N 26A-100809-L01) For the F / N variant, the following are supplied: • Core redundancy kit, as described at the top • Redunancy shelf with F-type In / N-type Out (P/N 16A-250000-200) • 2 x F-Male to F-Male cables (P/N 26A-100809-K01) • 2 x N-Male to N-Male cables (P/N 26A-100809-M01) Your redundancy kit may also include optional extras: • 2 x SCSI-II M-M cables (HSSI operation) (P/N 670-00HSSI-002) The three chassis should be placed into a rack mount. The 1:1 Redundancy unit is optimally placed beneath the two AMT-70 chassis to be connected. A connection overview is illustrated in Figure 65. __________________________________________________________________________ 133 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation Data RS-530 / HSSI port RX BUC / LNB TX/RX interface TX Redundancy RS-530 / HSSI ports LNB LAN, etc. MODEM 'B' Redundancy 1:1 REDUNDANCY RS-530 / HSSI port Redundancy TX RX MODEM 'A' BUC DCE Figure 65: RS-530 / HSSI redundancy system connection overview Make data and RF cable connections before connecting the AC power supplies. Connections for RS530 and HSSI-based systems are illustrated in Figure 66 and Figure 67. When the modems power up, the redundancy may not be active. To do this, use the command ‘redundancy on’ via the RS-232 port, after logging in to each modem. See the modem manual for guidance on logging in. (Usually, modems supplied with a redundancy kit ship with the redudancy enabled). Selection of the ‘active’ or ‘on-line’ path is done automatically by the system. The system is symmetrical and both modems should be configured with identical parameters. If both modems are alive and good at simultaneous power-up, the last ‘on-line’ path is usually adopted. If a ‘good’ modem powers up before the other ‘good’ modem powers up, it will assume the active path immediately. 134 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation __________________________________________________________________________ RS-530 DCE (To/From user net) RS-530 DTE A (To/From Modem A) RS-530 DTE B (To/From Modem B) MODEM 'A' REDUNDANCY LNB (IN) MODEM 'B' REDUNDANCY AC POWER IN 1 TO MODEM RX A B BUC (OUT) FROM MODEM TX AC POWER IN 2 A B Figure 66: 1:1 Redundancy shelf connections rear-view. RS-530 and BNC connections shown __________________________________________________________________________ MODEM 'A' REDUNDANCY AC POWER IN 1 HSSI DCE (To/From user net) HSSI DTE A (To/From Modem A) HSSI DTE B (To/From Modem B) MODEM 'B' REDUNDANCY LNB (IN) TO MODEM RX A B BUC (OUT) FROM MODEM TX AC POWER IN 2 A B Figure 67: 1:1 Redundancy shelf connections rear-view. HSSI and BNC connections shown 135 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation 11.1.2.1 Front panel push buttons The two buttons ‘Switch to A’ and ‘Switch to B’ are used to ‘force’ the redundancy shelf to switch to either Modem ‘A’ or Modem ‘B’ respectively. Push buttons LED indicators Figure 68: 1-1 Redundancy Controller (R5-530/HSSI only) front panel 11.1.2.2 LED indicators As illustrated in Figure 68. Designation PS 1 PS 2 Unit A Alarm Description Internal Power Supply #1 is ON Internal Power Supply #2 is ON Modem ‘A’ has asserted ‘Summary Fault’ condition Note - summary fault conditions can be changed. This is described in Chapter 3. Unit B Alarm Unit A On Line Modem ‘B’ has asserted ‘Summary Fault’ condition Modem ‘A’ is active When illuminated, transmit and receive pass through Modem ‘A’ Unit B On Line Power On Modem ‘B’ is active +12V sense for Modems and/or Redundancy unit 136 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation 11.2 Software Configuration In addition to the regular AMT-70 commands found in the main manual, a further five (5) are available with the redundancy ‘enabled’ units. These are detailed below. Figure 69: AMT-70/73 Redundancy Commands Command Description redundancy Enable / Disable the redundancy feature rdfltmask Redundancy Fault masking register rdforce Force the unit (redundancy switch) to the ACTIVE path rdstat Redundancy low-level status (diagnostic tool) rdswpos Redundancy switch position redundancy [ on | off ] When the redundancy system is enabled (on), the redundancy port is monitored to check the status of the other unit (if connected). In this state, the RF switch is controlled automatically by the redundancy software. The settings take effect on the next power-cycle or reboot. # redundancy on Redundancy = ON rdfltmask Redundancy Fault Mask. The redundancy system will always output ‘Fault’ to the other unit during a reset condition or power-off. The Fault Mask register allows the user to provide more situations where the Fault condition is generated. The Bit table of the Fault Mask Register below shows what further conditions can be monitored. The format of the command is as follow; rdfltmask [ 0 - 255 ] The user must compute the 8-bit value and use this as the argument to the command. Examples of usage are shown below. The modem must be rebooted for rdfltmask changes to take effect. Setting a value of 0 (zero) ‘masks’ ALL bits in the Fault Mask Register. In this state, any bit SET by the software is IGNORED and only the reset condition is considered a fault. 137 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation Conversely, setting a maximum value of 255 ‘unmasks’ ALL bits in the Fault Mask Register and any bit SET by the software becomes a fault condition. Figure 70: Redundancy Fault Mask Register 7 654 - - - - 3 2 1 0 (LSB) MOD. NOT RUNNING/ UNLOCKED/ FPGA FAILED - DEMOD COMMS FAILED/ UNLOCKED MOD. OUTPUT ENABLED Examples: # rdfltmask 1 Redundancy Fault Mask = 1 Setting the Fault Mask to 1 means when the Modulator output is disabled for some reason, a fault condition will be generated on the redundancy output. If the other unit’s redundancy system is enabled, reads good and the cables are connected, the other unit will actuate the switch upon reading the fault condition. # rdfltmask 8 Redundancy Fault Mask = 8 A fault status is generated for an internal Modulator failure, but NOT for a disabled output problem. (Setting rdfltmask 9 will consider ALL conditions above for fault output). NOTE: The modem MUST be rebooted for rdfltmask changes to take effect. rdforce Force the Redundancy switch to the ACTIVE (on-line) position for this unit. will work whether the Redundancy system is enabled or disabled. Note that this command A one-second drive pulse is fed to the RF switch. Also note that the drive is one-way, i.e. the unit can only drive the RF switch to the ACTIVE state for itself. The user must communicate with the other unit directly and use the same command to drive the RF switch in the opposite direction. Example: # rdforce Switch is forced to ACTIVE for this unit 138 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation rdstat This command is provided primarily as a debug tool. The user can see the redundancy software signal I/O and the system interpretation of the signal statuses. Example: # rdstat Redundancy System Parameters Switch position: 0x0C Discrete In: 0x01, Discrete Out: 0x00 This unit status: DISCONNECT, Good Other unit reads: Fault The command rdswpos read the position of the RF switch. rdswpos The status can be as follow; ACTIVE, REDUNDANT, DISCONNECT, SHORT or UNKNOWN. Example: # rdswpos This Unit = REDUNDANT The RF switch is switched to the other unit. This unit is the Redundant unit and the other is the Active unit. 139 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation 11.3 Messages The following are console messages generated when the redundancy system is enabled. N.B. ‘This unit’ refers to the console you are interfacing with. ‘Other unit’ refers to the other unit in the redundancy system. “REDUNDANT unit fault” This unit is ACTIVE and has monitored the other unit as in a fault state. This message will appear when this unit first senses the condition or condition change on the other unit. “Switch fault (possible short)” The redundancy cable is not connected properly, has a fault (most likely a short between the position sensing inputs), or another cable with different functionality is connected. Power off the unit and check the cabling. “Switch unreadable (possible disconnect)” Usually appears when the cable is disconnected, but could appear because of a bad cable. Check cable wiring. “System in unknown state” This message should not appear in almost any circumstance. This may indicate redundancy software failure. “REDUNDANT unit ready” This unit is ACTIVE and has monitored the other unit as in a ready (Good) state. This message will appear when this unit first senses the condition or condition change on the other unit. “ACTIVE unit fault” This unit is REDUNDANT and has monitored the other unit as in a fault state. This is the RF path switching condition. Provided this unit is in a Good state, the RF switch is driven to the ACTIVE role for this unit. The other unit becomes the REDUNDANT unit. “BOTH units fault” This unit and the other unit have both been monitored as in a fault state. “Unit now ACTIVE” This message can appear either when the unit powers up with redundancy enabled, or after a Wireharness reconnect to this unit. This indicates this unit is the ACTIVE (on-line) unit. “This unit REDUNDANT” This message can appear either when the unit powers up with redundancy enabled, or after a Wireharness reconnect to this unit. This indicates this unit is the REDUNDANT (off-line) unit. 140 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation CHAPTER 12 APPENDIX A SYSTEM CONSIDERATIONS A.1 Typical AMT-70L/AMT-73L Interconnections Following are some useful tips on setting up an earth station using the AMT-70L/AMT-73L modem. OUTDOOR (ODU) BUC LNB Antenna INDOOR Rx 950-2150 MHz Data Port RS-530 AMT-70 Tx 950-2000 MHz (IDU) L-band Modulator L-band Demodulator M&C Interface Complete ODU Interface Secondary M&C Interface RS-485 Figure 71: Typical AMT-70 cabling installation INDOOR (4) Data Ports 1,2 AMT-70 RS-530 Rx 52 - 88 MHz 3,4 Pwr Div C, X or Ku Band Down Converter C, X or Ku Band Down Converter From Antenna (LNA) From Antenna (LNA) Multiple M&C Interface RS-232/RS-485 10/100 Base-T Figure 72: Installation using 70 MHz Inputs A.1.1 Setting the transmit levels 141 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation The output power level of the modulator is adjustable from 0 to -25 dBm. Figure 73: Power Loss in LMR-600 Cable versus Cable Length -5 -10 BUC Input Level (dBm) -15 -20 -25 -30 -35 -40 10 100 200 300 Length of LM R-600 Cable (ft) 950 2000 MH MH The TX gain past the modulator output should be set for the desired EIRP level of the Earth Station. The ideal situation is to have the gain of the BUC set to give a rated output power of -25 dBm input. Figure 73 illustrates the power reaching the BUC vs. the cable length between the modulator and the BUC for two frequencies and with the modulator at maximum and minimum output power. The shaded area in the previous indicates the useful range of the signal power available from the modulator output, at the BUC input (for any length of cable up to 300 feet). Some points to note: In this case, LMR-600 cable from Times Microwave Systems is used. LMR-600 cable is low-loss. If cable with a more typical loss of 12 dB per 100 feet is used, the maximum cable run is approximately 100 feet. Other cables can be substituted for the LMR-600 Times Microwave Systems cable, such as the CommScope 3227 cable, which has an attenuation of 6.05 dB @ 1800 MHz, which will increase the distance from the modem to the BUC by up to 200 feet. The BUC power and gain are assumed to be 5W (37 dBm at 1 dB compression) unit with a fixed gain of 50 dB. This chart indicates that the BUC will be in compression with a 300 ft cable and the modem output set to +5 dBm and the highest frequency. Slightly longer cable lengths are possible with BUCs of higher gain, though the slope delta worsens with rising frequency. Through the use of special slope equalizers and amplifiers, the distance between the modem and the BUC can be extended. 142 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation It is important to note that a +24/+48 VDC offset and a 10MHz reference signal may be present at the modulator output. The DC voltage may supply up to 4 Amperes and will damage any DC coupled device (such as an attenuator) connected to the modulator output. Also, a typical attenuator on the modulator output would reduce the level of 10 MHz reference signal available to the BUC. Special inline10/20 dB attenuators are available from AdvantechAMT that pass DC (up to 6A) and 10-50MHz reference in either direction and only attenuate the L-Band signals by the amount specified. Also available are amplitude/slope equalizers that compensate for losses and “tilt” caused by the cable and other devices between the modem and the BUC, such as power combiners. Some are rackmounted units, which include self-contained power supplies, and others are in-line modules that utilize the DC power from the modem. A.2 LNB, BUC & Antenna Installation A.2.1 Choosing the LNB & BUC The AMT-70 product line is compatible with all OEM compliant BUC / LNB products. However the AMT-70 product line is fully tested with the AdvantechAMT high power solid state power amplifiers (SSPAs), booster amplifiers, block up converters for up-link applications and low noise amplifiers (LNAs) for down-link applications. The AdvantechAMT SSPAs are available in L-, C-, X- and Ku-Band models and are available in both indoor rack-mount or in outdoor hub-mount weatherproof enclosures. AdvantechAMT also features the tri-band SSPA which is designed to operate in any of the C-, X- and Ku- satellite communication bands. A.2.2 LNB Physical Installation Fit the LNB with a suitable feed horn and attach to the antenna ensuring correct *LNB polarization. Connect a suitable 75R low loss co-axial cable between the receiver RF input and the LNB. The connection to the LNB should be protected with self-amalgamating tape. If the antenna has previously been accurately pointed at the required satellite the modem may be switched on and the receiver parameters set. A.2.3 Antenna Alignment The following sub sections provide information on pointing the receive antenna accurately at the required satellite. The antenna must have a clear “line of sight” view of the satellite. This means that the pointing angle must be clear of tall buildings, trees and other high objects. If the view to the south is generally clear the antenna site will be suitable. However if there are obstructions to the south the actual pointing angles will have be checked to see if the site is suitable. A.2.4 Satellite Position Most communications satellites appear stationary in the sky from any location on the earth. This is because their speed is matched to the rotational speed of the earth taking into account the fact that their orbit is much greater than the earth’s circumference. These satellites are said to be in geostationary or geosynchronous orbits. Geostationary satellites can only have one orbit, which is 22,238 miles (35,786 kilometers) directly above the equator. 143 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation This single orbit has to be used because it is the only one where the G force generated by the speed a satellite needs to travel at to match the earth’s rotation equals the gravitational pull of the earth. Any other orbit and the satellite would either crash to earth or fly out into space. The direction an antenna must point in order to receive the signal from a given satellite is determined by the antenna’s location north or south of the equator and the position on the equator over which the satellite is located. A satellite’s position is given in degrees of latitude and longitude in the same manner as a position on earth. Latitude is measured in degrees north or south of the equator which is at 0 degrees latitude. The range is from 90 degrees north via 0 to 90 degrees south. For example, London UK is 51° 32’ north and Sydney Australia is 33°55’ south. Since any geostationary satellite must be over the equator its latitude is always zero degrees. Longitude is measured in degrees east or west of the Prime Meridian. The Prime Meridian is at 0° longitude and is an imaginary line running north/south on the earth’s surface from the north pole to the south pole and passing through the Greenwich Observatory in England. All other points in the world are either east or west of this line. There are 360° of longitude expressed as 0° to 180° east and 0° to 180° west. 180°E is the same location as 180°W and this position is the International Date Line. For example, Sydney Australia is at 151° 10’E whereas Washington DC USA is at 77° 00’W. The latitude of a satellite is the same as that of the location on the equator directly below it. For the purpose of calculation, latitude and longitude are represented as decimals. The sign of the decimal is used to distinguish North (positive) and South (negative), and East (positive) and West (negative). So for the above examples: Latitude (London, UK): 51°32’N +51.53° Latitude (Sydney, Australia): 33°55’S -33.92° Longitude (Sydney, Australia): 151°10’E +151.17° Longitude (Washington DC, USA): 77°00’W -77.00° A.2.5 Antenna Pointing Angles The Azimuth and Elevation angles along which an antenna must point to receive a particular satellites signal can be calculated. The information required for the calculation is the location, in latitude and longitude, of the antenna and the longitude of the satellite. Three calculations are required, one to calculate a value to be used in the Azimuth and elevation calculations. The formulas are: d= s 2 + e 2 − (2 ⋅ s ⋅ e ⋅ cos( a ) ⋅ cos( b − c ) ) ⎛ s2 − e2 − d 2 Elevation = sin −1 ⎜⎜ ⎝ 2⋅e⋅d ⎞ ⎟⎟ ⎠ ⎛ ⎞ s ⋅ sin (b − c ) ⎟ Azimuth = 180 ± tan −1 ⎜ ⎜ cos (Elevation ) ⋅ d 2 − s 2 ⋅ sin (b − c ) ⎟ ⎝ ⎠ Where: 144 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation s = satellite distance from center of earth = 42165Km e = radius of the earth = 6370Km a = latitude of antenna (in degrees) b = longitude of satellite (in degrees) c = longitude of antenna (in degrees) d = distance from antenna to satellite (in Km) The sign of +/- in the azimuth calculation is determined by the relative positions of the antenna and satellite. 180° is due south. If the satellite is east of the antenna the result of the calculation is subtracted from 180. If the satellite is west of the antenna the result of the calculation is added to 180. Example: Pointing an antenna at SES-ASTRA 1F (longitude b= +19.3°), from London, UK (latitude a = 51.5°, longitude c = -1.4°) d = 42165 2 + 6370 2 − (2 ⋅ 41625 ⋅ 6370 ⋅ cos(51.5) ⋅ cos(19.2 + 1.4) ) = 38800 Km ⎛ 42165 2 − 6370 2 − 38800 2 ⎞ ⎟⎟ = 27.97 o Elevation = sin −1 ⎜⎜ 2 6370 38800 ⋅ ⋅ ⎠ ⎝ ⎛ ⎞ 42165 ⋅ sin (19.2 + 1.4) ⎟ = 150.48o Azimuth = 180 − tan −1 ⎜ ⎜ cos(27.97 ) ⋅ 38800 2 − 42165 2 ⋅ sin (19.2 + 1.4 ) ⎟ ⎝ ⎠ A.2.6 Pointing the Antenna Use a sighting compass to align the antenna in azimuth and an inclinometer to set the elevation angle. Subtract any antenna offset from the required elevation angle when measuring. The antenna is now pointing approximately at the satellite but needs to be aligned more accurately for use. Accurate alignment requires signal strength measuring equipment such as a spectrum analyzer. Connect the spectrum analyzer to the antenna LNB. If the LNB requires a DC supply, ensure that this is enabled. Also ensure that a DC block is inserted before the spectrum analyzer input to avoid damage. Tune the spectrum analyzer to the correct down converted frequency. Make a mark on the azimuth positioning assembly and another mark, in line with the first, on the fixed part of the antenna assembly. Slowly rotate the antenna to about 10° either side of the mark (about one eighth of a quadrant) whilst watching the spectrum analyzer for the signal. If the signal is found peak it on the spectrum analyzer with the azimuth movement and lock the movement. In a similar manner move the elevation through a few degrees to peak the signal. Lock the movement. Rotate the LNB horn assembly to peak the signal in polarization. Once again, lock the movement. Repeat all the above to ensure that the signal is fully peaked. Lock all movements making sure that the locking off does not cause further movement. If no signal is found during the azimuth movement return the antenna to center and increase the elevation by an amount equal to the beam width of the antenna. Repeat the swings in azimuth. If there is still no signal, increase the elevation by another beam width and sweep the azimuth again. Continue in this manner until the elevation has been increase by 2 to 3 degrees. If there is still no signal, lower the elevation from nominal and make the swings in azimuth. Ensure that the azimuth moves are made very slowly otherwise the signal may be missed. 145 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation If the signal cannot be found check the calculations and the coarse pointing procedure before repeating the above. NOTE: If the satellite concerned is supporting TV signals, alignment may be carried out using standard signal strength measuring equipment designed for the satellite TV industry. Substitute a standard TVRO LNB and follow the above procedure whilst watching the signal strength meter. Once the antenna is pointed in this way, refit the system LNB. Alignment can be rechecked once the receiver has acquired the correct signal by using Eb/No readings from the receiver and by monitoring the signal quality indicator on the front of the receiver. A.2.7 Input Level Range Versus Symbol Rate The composite input power range for the AMT-70L and the AMT-73L is dependant on the Symbol Rate of the incoming data. (Remember, Symbol Rate is the transmitted data rate, and is dependant on Data Rate, FEC Code Rate, and Modulation scheme. To calculate the Symbol Rate, the formula is as follows:) Symbol Rate = Data rate x 1/Code Rate Modulation Where Modulation = 1 for BPSK; 2 for QPSK; 3 for 8PSK, and 4 for 16QAM The charts below provide the range of input power versus data rate for the AMT-70L and the AMT-73L modems. AMT-70L Demod IF Carrier versus Symbol Rate 0.0 Desired Carrier Input Level (dBm) -10.0 -20.0 -30.0 Maximum -40.0 -50.0 Nominal -60.0 Minimum -70.0 10 100 1000 10000 100000 DesiredCarrierSymbolRate(ksps) 146 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation AMT-73L Demod IF Carrier versus Symbol Rate 0.0 Desired Carrier Input Level (dBm) -10.0 -20.0 -30.0 -40.0 -50.0 Maximum -60.0 -70.0 Nominal -80.0 -90.0 Minimum -100.0 10 100 1000 10000 100000 Desired Carrier Symbol Rate (ksps) 147 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation CHAPTER 13 CONVERSION APPENDIX B S/N TO EB/NO Eb/No or more properly, Eb/N0, is defined as the ratio of Energy per Bit to Spectral Noise Density in a 1 Hz bandwidth. It is used in digital communications to define the signal strength required at the input of the demodulator to provide a desired Bit Error Ratio (BER). Eb/No is independent of the system data rate and symbol rate. Eb/No is difficult to measure with standard test equipment, such as Spectrum Analyzers. The typical Spectrum Analyzer displays a ratio of Signal plus Noise/Noise, or (S + N)/N. The charts below provides the (S + N)/N to Eb/No conversions for the most popular modulation and code rates. A simple but quick method of determining Eb/No is obtained by measuring the (S + N)/N value using an accurate Spectrum Analyzer. The analyzer needs to be looking at the same signal that the demodulator will see. A two-way power divider in the receive path with one output connected to the Spectrum Analyzer and the other to the demod input is acceptable. The common input would be from the satellite feed. Follow the steps below to obtain a reasonable measurement of (S + N)/N, which then can be translated to Eb/No values by using the following charts. • Set the Resolution Bandwidth to less than 20% of the transmitted symbol rate. • Set the Video Resolution to reduce the noise variation. Video averaging is also acceptable, if the analyzer has that feature. • Start at 10 dB per vertical division and scale down to 2 dB (if possible) to obtain the noise floor / carrier within the same display. This will allow the measurement to be more accurate. • Using the Spectrum Analyzer marker, place the marker over the center part of the wanted carrier. If the analyzer includes a delta measurement capability, then use the delta marker placed over a blank area of the noise (no carriers present), and read the difference between the carrier level and the noise level. This value is the (S + N)/N. • If the spectrum analyzer does not have a delta marker function, then record the carrier signal level, then record the noise level, and subtract the two. This value will constitute the (S + N)/N reading. • Then using the following charts, select the Eb/No that is closest to the obtained (S + N)/N, remembering that you must follow the proper modulation type and FEC code rate. 148 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation (dB) (dB) Viterbi 1/2 Viterbi 2/3 Viterbi 3/4 Viterbi 7/8 TPC16K-2/5 TPC16K-3/5 TPC4K-3/4 TPC16K-8/9 TPC16K-19/20 (S+N)/N 4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5 6.0 6.5 7.0 7.5 8.0 8.5 9.0 9.5 10.0 10.5 11.0 11.5 12.0 12.5 13.0 13.5 14.0 14.5 15.0 15.5 16.0 16.5 17.0 17.5 18.0 18.5 19.0 19.5 20.0 20.5 21.0 21.5 22.0 22.5 23.0 23.5 24.0 24.5 25.0 Es/N0 1.8 2.6 3.3 4.1 4.7 5.4 6.0 6.6 7.3 7.8 8.4 9.0 9.5 10.1 10.6 11.2 11.7 12.2 12.8 13.3 13.8 14.3 14.9 15.4 15.9 16.4 16.9 17.4 17.9 18.4 18.9 19.5 20.0 20.5 21.0 21.5 22.0 22.5 23.0 23.5 24.0 24.5 25.0 Eb/N0 1.8 2.6 3.3 4.1 4.7 5.4 6.0 6.6 7.3 7.8 8.4 9.0 9.5 10.1 10.6 11.2 11.7 12.2 12.8 13.3 13.8 14.3 14.9 15.4 15.9 16.4 16.9 17.4 17.9 18.4 18.9 19.5 20.0 20.5 21.0 21.5 22.0 22.5 23.0 23.5 24.0 24.5 25.0 Eb/N0 0.5 1.3 2.1 2.8 3.5 4.1 4.8 5.4 6.0 6.6 7.2 7.7 8.3 8.8 9.4 9.9 10.5 11.0 11.5 12.1 12.6 13.1 13.6 14.1 14.6 15.2 15.7 16.2 16.7 17.2 17.7 18.2 18.7 19.2 19.7 20.2 20.7 21.2 21.7 22.2 22.7 23.2 23.7 Eb/N0 0.0 0.8 1.6 2.3 3.0 3.6 4.3 4.9 5.5 6.1 6.7 7.2 7.8 8.3 8.9 9.4 10.0 10.5 11.0 11.5 12.1 12.6 13.1 13.6 14.1 14.6 15.2 15.7 16.2 16.7 17.2 17.7 18.2 18.7 19.2 19.7 20.2 20.7 21.2 21.7 22.2 22.7 23.2 Eb/N0 -0.6 0.2 0.9 1.6 2.3 3.0 3.6 4.2 4.8 5.4 6.0 6.6 7.1 7.7 8.2 8.8 9.3 9.8 10.3 10.9 11.4 11.9 12.4 12.9 13.5 14.0 14.5 15.0 15.5 16.0 16.5 17.0 17.5 18.0 18.5 19.0 19.5 20.0 20.5 21.1 21.6 22.1 22.6 Eb/N0 2.3 3.1 3.8 4.5 5.2 5.9 6.5 7.1 7.7 8.3 8.9 9.5 10.0 10.6 11.1 11.7 12.2 12.7 13.3 13.8 14.3 14.8 15.3 15.9 16.4 16.9 17.4 17.9 18.4 18.9 19.4 19.9 20.4 20.9 21.4 21.9 22.4 23.0 23.5 24.0 24.5 25.0 25.5 Eb/N0 1.1 1.9 2.6 3.4 4.0 4.7 5.3 5.9 6.5 7.1 7.7 8.3 8.8 9.4 9.9 10.5 11.0 11.5 12.1 12.6 13.1 13.6 14.2 14.7 15.2 15.7 16.2 16.7 17.2 17.7 18.2 18.7 19.3 19.8 20.3 20.8 21.3 21.8 22.3 22.8 23.3 23.8 24.3 Eb/N0 -0.1 0.7 1.5 2.2 2.9 3.5 4.2 4.8 5.4 6.0 6.6 7.1 7.7 8.2 8.8 9.3 9.9 10.4 10.9 11.5 12.0 12.5 13.0 13.5 14.0 14.6 15.1 15.6 16.1 16.6 17.1 17.6 18.1 18.6 19.1 19.6 20.1 20.6 21.1 21.6 22.1 22.6 23.1 Eb/N0 -0.6 0.2 1.0 1.7 2.4 3.0 3.7 4.3 4.9 5.5 6.0 6.6 7.2 7.7 8.3 8.8 9.3 9.9 10.4 10.9 11.5 12.0 12.5 13.0 13.5 14.0 14.5 15.1 15.6 16.1 16.6 17.1 17.6 18.1 18.6 19.1 19.6 20.1 20.6 21.1 21.6 22.1 22.6 Eb/N0 -0.8 0.0 0.7 1.4 2.1 2.8 3.4 4.0 4.6 5.2 5.8 6.4 6.9 7.5 8.0 8.6 9.1 9.6 10.2 10.7 11.2 11.7 12.2 12.8 13.3 13.8 14.3 14.8 15.3 15.8 16.3 16.8 17.3 17.8 18.3 18.9 19.4 19.9 20.4 20.9 21.4 21.9 22.4 Figure 74: QSSK (S+N) Conversion Chart 149 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation (dB) (S+N)/N 4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5 6.0 6.5 7.0 7.5 8.0 8.5 9.0 9.5 10.0 10.5 11.0 11.5 12.0 12.5 13.0 13.5 14.0 14.5 15.0 15.5 16.0 16.5 17.0 17.5 18.0 18.5 19.0 19.5 20.0 20.5 21.0 21.5 22.0 22.5 23.0 23.5 24.0 24.5 25.0 (dB) Es/N0 1.8 2.6 3.3 4.1 4.7 5.4 6.0 6.6 7.3 7.8 8.4 9.0 9.5 10.1 10.6 11.2 11.7 12.2 12.8 13.3 13.8 14.3 14.9 15.4 15.9 16.4 16.9 17.4 17.9 18.4 18.9 19.5 20.0 20.5 21.0 21.5 22.0 22.5 23.0 23.5 24.0 24.5 25.0 Viterbi 1/2 Eb/N0 0.0 0.8 1.6 2.3 3.0 3.6 4.3 4.9 5.5 6.1 6.7 7.2 7.8 8.3 8.9 9.4 10.0 10.5 11.0 11.5 12.1 12.6 13.1 13.6 14.1 14.6 15.2 15.7 16.2 16.7 17.2 17.7 18.2 18.7 19.2 19.7 20.2 20.7 21.2 21.7 22.2 22.7 23.2 Viterbi 2/3 Eb/N0 -1.2 -0.4 0.3 1.1 1.7 2.4 3.0 3.6 4.2 4.8 5.4 6.0 6.5 7.1 7.6 8.2 8.7 9.2 9.8 10.3 10.8 11.3 11.8 12.4 12.9 13.4 13.9 14.4 14.9 15.4 15.9 16.4 16.9 17.5 18.0 18.5 19.0 19.5 20.0 20.5 21.0 21.5 22.0 Viterbi 3/4 Eb/N0 -1.7 -0.9 -0.2 0.5 1.2 1.9 2.5 3.1 3.7 4.3 4.9 5.5 6.0 6.6 7.1 7.7 8.2 8.7 9.3 9.8 10.3 10.8 11.3 11.9 12.4 12.9 13.4 13.9 14.4 14.9 15.4 15.9 16.4 16.9 17.4 17.9 18.5 19.0 19.5 20.0 20.5 21.0 21.5 Viterbi 7/8 Eb/N0 -2.4 -1.6 -0.8 -0.1 0.6 1.2 1.8 2.5 3.1 3.6 4.2 4.8 5.4 5.9 6.4 7.0 7.5 8.1 8.6 9.1 9.6 10.2 10.7 11.2 11.7 12.2 12.7 13.2 13.7 14.2 14.8 15.3 15.8 16.3 16.8 17.3 17.8 18.3 18.8 19.3 19.8 20.3 20.8 TPC16K-2/5 Eb/N0 0.5 1.3 2.1 2.8 3.5 4.1 4.7 5.4 6.0 6.6 7.1 7.7 8.3 8.8 9.4 9.9 10.4 11.0 11.5 12.0 12.5 13.1 13.6 14.1 14.6 15.1 15.6 16.1 16.6 17.2 17.7 18.2 18.7 19.2 19.7 20.2 20.7 21.2 21.7 22.2 22.7 23.2 23.7 TPC16K-3/5 Eb/N0 -0.7 0.1 0.9 1.6 2.3 2.9 3.6 4.2 4.8 5.4 5.9 6.5 7.1 7.6 8.2 8.7 9.3 9.8 10.3 10.8 11.4 11.9 12.4 12.9 13.4 13.9 14.4 15.0 15.5 16.0 16.5 17.0 17.5 18.0 18.5 19.0 19.5 20.0 20.5 21.0 21.5 22.0 22.5 TPC4K-3/4 Eb/N0 -1.8 -1.0 -0.3 0.5 1.1 1.8 2.4 3.0 3.6 4.2 4.8 5.4 5.9 6.5 7.0 7.6 8.1 8.6 9.2 9.7 10.2 10.7 11.2 11.8 12.3 12.8 13.3 13.8 14.3 14.8 15.3 15.8 16.3 16.9 17.4 17.9 18.4 18.9 19.4 19.9 20.4 20.9 21.4 TPC16K-8/9 Eb/N0 -2.3 -1.5 -0.8 -0.1 0.6 1.3 1.9 2.5 3.1 3.7 4.3 4.9 5.4 6.0 6.5 7.1 7.6 8.1 8.6 9.2 9.7 10.2 10.7 11.2 11.8 12.3 12.8 13.3 13.8 14.3 14.8 15.3 15.8 16.3 16.8 17.3 17.8 18.3 18.8 19.3 19.9 20.4 20.9 TPC16K-19/20 Eb/N0 -2.6 -1.8 -1.0 -0.3 0.4 1.0 1.7 2.3 2.9 3.5 4.0 4.6 5.2 5.7 6.3 6.8 7.3 7.9 8.4 8.9 9.4 10.0 10.5 11.0 11.5 12.0 12.5 13.0 13.6 14.1 14.6 15.1 15.6 16.1 16.6 17.1 17.6 18.1 18.6 19.1 19.6 20.1 20.6 Figure 75: 8PSK (S+N) Conversion Chart 150 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation (dB) (S+N)/N 4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5 6.0 6.5 7.0 7.5 8.0 8.5 9.0 9.5 10.0 10.5 11.0 11.5 12.0 12.5 13.0 13.5 14.0 14.5 15.0 15.5 16.0 16.5 17.0 17.5 18.0 18.5 19.0 19.5 20.0 20.5 21.0 21.5 22.0 22.5 23.0 23.5 24.0 24.5 25.0 (dB) Es/N0 1.8 2.6 3.3 4.1 4.7 5.4 6.0 6.6 7.3 7.8 8.4 9.0 9.5 10.1 10.6 11.2 11.7 12.2 12.8 13.3 13.8 14.3 14.9 15.4 15.9 16.4 16.9 17.4 17.9 18.4 18.9 19.5 20.0 20.5 21.0 21.5 22.0 22.5 23.0 23.5 24.0 24.5 25.0 Viterbi 1/2 Eb/N0 -1.2 -0.4 0.3 1.1 1.7 2.4 3.0 3.6 4.2 4.8 5.4 6.0 6.5 7.1 7.6 8.2 8.7 9.2 9.8 10.3 10.8 11.3 11.9 12.4 12.9 13.4 13.9 14.4 14.9 15.4 15.9 16.4 16.9 17.5 18.0 18.5 19.0 19.5 20.0 20.5 21.0 21.5 22.0 Viterbi 2/3 Eb/N0 -2.5 -1.7 -0.9 -0.2 0.5 1.1 1.8 2.4 3.0 3.6 4.2 4.7 5.3 5.8 6.4 6.9 7.5 8.0 8.5 9.0 9.6 10.1 10.6 11.1 11.6 12.1 12.7 13.2 13.7 14.2 14.7 15.2 15.7 16.2 16.7 17.2 17.7 18.2 18.7 19.2 19.7 20.2 20.7 Viterbi 3/4 Eb/N0 -3.0 -2.2 -1.4 -0.7 0.0 0.6 1.3 1.9 2.5 3.1 3.6 4.2 4.8 5.3 5.9 6.4 6.9 7.5 8.0 8.5 9.1 9.6 10.1 10.6 11.1 11.6 12.1 12.7 13.2 13.7 14.2 14.7 15.2 15.7 16.2 16.7 17.2 17.7 18.2 18.7 19.2 19.7 20.2 Viterbi 7/8 Eb/N0 -3.6 -2.8 -2.1 -1.4 -0.7 0.0 0.6 1.2 1.8 2.4 3.0 3.5 4.1 4.7 5.2 5.7 6.3 6.8 7.3 7.9 8.4 8.9 9.4 9.9 10.4 11.0 11.5 12.0 12.5 13.0 13.5 14.0 14.5 15.0 15.5 16.0 16.5 17.0 17.5 18.0 18.5 19.0 19.5 TPC16K-2/5 Eb/N0 -0.7 0.1 0.8 1.5 2.2 2.9 3.5 4.1 4.7 5.3 5.9 6.4 7.0 7.6 8.1 8.6 9.2 9.7 10.2 10.8 11.3 11.8 12.3 12.8 13.4 13.9 14.4 14.9 15.4 15.9 16.4 16.9 17.4 17.9 18.4 18.9 19.4 19.9 20.4 20.9 21.4 21.9 22.5 TPC16K-3/5 Eb/N0 -1.9 -1.1 -0.4 0.3 1.0 1.7 2.3 2.9 3.5 4.1 4.7 5.3 5.8 6.4 6.9 7.5 8.0 8.5 9.1 9.6 10.1 10.6 11.1 11.7 12.2 12.7 13.2 13.7 14.2 14.7 15.2 15.7 16.2 16.7 17.2 17.8 18.3 18.8 19.3 19.8 20.3 20.8 21.3 TPC4K-3/4 Eb/N0 -3.1 -2.3 -1.5 -0.8 -0.1 0.5 1.2 1.8 2.4 3.0 3.6 4.1 4.7 5.2 5.8 6.3 6.9 7.4 7.9 8.4 9.0 9.5 10.0 10.5 11.0 11.5 12.1 12.6 13.1 13.6 14.1 14.6 15.1 15.6 16.1 16.6 17.1 17.6 18.1 18.6 19.1 19.6 20.1 TPC16K-8/9 Eb/N0 -3.6 -2.8 -2.0 -1.3 -0.6 0.0 0.7 1.3 1.9 2.5 3.0 3.6 4.2 4.7 5.3 5.8 6.3 6.9 7.4 7.9 8.4 9.0 9.5 10.0 10.5 11.0 11.5 12.0 12.6 13.1 13.6 14.1 14.6 15.1 15.6 16.1 16.6 17.1 17.6 18.1 18.6 19.1 19.6 TPC16K-19/20 Eb/N0 -3.8 -3.0 -2.3 -1.6 -0.9 -0.2 0.4 1.0 1.6 2.2 2.8 3.4 3.9 4.5 5.0 5.6 6.1 6.6 7.1 7.7 8.2 8.7 9.2 9.7 10.3 10.8 11.3 11.8 12.3 12.8 13.3 13.8 14.3 14.8 15.3 15.8 16.3 16.8 17.3 17.9 18.4 18.9 19.4 Figure 76: 16QAM (S+N)/N Conversion Chart 151 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation CHAPTER 14 ROUTER APPENDIX C EMBEDDED AMT70/73 modems can be optionally equipped with the Advantech Embedded Router module (AERo) that provides the AMT70/73 modems with the full functionality of an IP router, FRAD (Frame Relay Access Device) and bridge. With this option the AMT70/73 modems, without the need for any additional data telecommunication equipment, can support a wide range of network solutions. RFFE Out RFFE In AMT70 Mod AMT70 Demod DCE RS-530 TX DCE RS-530 RX DTE RS-530 TX DTE RS-530 RX Serial 0 DTE RS-530 TX DTE RS-530 RX Serial 1 AERo Advantech Embedded Router 10/100B-T RS-232 Console Figure 77: Embedded Router Support The AERo option adds two additional RJ-45 connectors (JA and JB) to the rear panel – Figure 2. Connector JA provides a standard 10/100B-T data connection and JB a RS-232, Cisco like, control console port. Figure 78: AMT-70/73L Rear Panel equipped with AERo option 152 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation AERo supports standard Advantech set of the interfaces: Physical interfaces: • WAN: bidirectional and receive only up to 20Mbit/s; • LAN: 10/100Base-T Data Link: • WAN - HDLC (Cisco compatible), PPP, Frame Relay; • LAN IEEE802.3 10Base-T, IEEE802.3u 100Base-T Bridging; • MAC level access lists; • VLAN TCP/IP stack: • Routing: static, dynamic (RIP v.1, v.2); • Packets filtering (firewall); • IP tunneling (IP over IP, GRE); • Static switching; • IP aliases support; • Proxy ARP; • UDP broadcasts forwarding (DHCP, DNS, BOOTP, etc.) QoS Level 3: • FIFO queue (FIFOQ); • Priority queuing (PRIQ); • Class based queuing (CBQ); • Hierarchical Fair Service Curve (HFSC); • Random Early Detection (RED); • Waited Fair Queue (WFQ) Configurable IP policy: • ICMP policy; • Routing policy; • Switching policy; • TCP policy; • UDP policy Frame Relay Stack: • Frame Relay PVC; • Link management: ITU-T Q.933 / Annex A, ANSI T1.617 / Annex D, LMI or disabled; • QoS: Priority; CIR, Bc, Be; • Interface types : UNI – User; UNI – Network; NNI; • Multiprotocol encapsulation: RFC1490 (IP over FR); • Frame Relay switching; • Frame Relay fragmentation: FRF12 (UNI-NNI, End to End) 153 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation Services: • • • • • • • • • • DHCP client; DNS client; FTP/TFTP client; NAT; CDP; IP spoofing; AAA (Authentication, authorization and accounting): Local AAA (Access rights table); PAP, CHAP, MS-CHAP (Client/ Server); RADIUS, TACACS+ (Client, Remote server authentication) Management: • • • • • • • • • • Terminal configuration ports: RS-232 console and telnet; Terminal configuration interface; Cisco like command interpreter; Script support; Running and startup configurations saving and recovery; SNMP agent v.1, v.2, v.3, MIB II; Built-in diagnostic; Ping, traceroute; Local statistics (interfaces, IP, TCP, UDP, ICMP, Frame Relay and etc.); Debugging functions 154 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation CHAPTER 15 APPENDIX D PERFORMANCE GATEWAY HIGH- The high-speed AMT-7x family of modems can optionally be equipped with the Advantech HighPerformance Gateway (AHPG). The AHPG is a sophisticated, leading-edge interface that can support a full range of data traffic capabilities, from transparent bridging for simple applications, to complicated dynamic and static routing and switching. The AHPG can support unidirectional or bidirectional, symmetrical or non-symmetrical links. On the WAN side it can support a flexible set of encapsulations including HDLC, Frame Relay, MPE and ULE. 10/100BT Port 0 (ETH0) PHY MAC HDLC Codec 10/100BT Port 1 (ETH1) PHY MAC AMT-70 MODULATOR Console I/F (CONSOLE RS-232) Serial - to - parallel Internal Traffic Routing HSSI (DCE) RF OUT AMT-70 DEMODULATOR IP GATEWAY CONTROLLER NMS CONTROL PROCESSOR (LINUX) Front Panel control (Via menus) RF IN 9-pin serial port (P7 RS232) Ethernet (Telnet Session) Figure 79. AHPG support 155 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation The AHPG supports standard Advantech set of the interfaces: Physical interfaces: • WAN: bidirectional and receive only up to 140Mbit/s; • LAN: 2 x 10/100Base-T or HSSI Data Link: • WAN - HDLC (Cisco compatible), PPP, Frame Relay; • LAN IEEE802.3 10Base-T, IEEE802.3u 100Base-T Bridging; • MAC level access lists; • VLAN TCP/IP stack: • Routing: static, dynamic (RIP v.1, v.2); • Packets filtering (firewall); • IP tunneling (IP over IP, GRE); • Static switching; • IP aliases support; • Proxy ARP; • UDP broadcasts forwarding (DHCP, DNS, BOOTP, etc.) QoS Level 3: • FIFO queue (FIFOQ); • Priority queuing (PRIQ); • Class based queuing (CBQ); • Hierarchical Fair Service Curve (HFSC); • Random Early Detection (RED); • Weighted Fair Queue (WFQ) Configurable IP policy: • ICMP policy; • Routing policy; • Switching policy; • TCP policy; • UDP policy Frame Relay Stack: • Frame Relay PVC; • Link management: ITU-T Q.933 / Annex A, ANSI T1.617 / Annex D, LMI or disabled; • QoS: Priority; CIR, Bc, Be; • Interface types : UNI – User; UNI – Network; NNI; • Multiprotocol encapsulation: RFC1490 (IP over FR); • Frame Relay switching; • Frame Relay fragmentation: FRF12 (UNI-NNI, End to End) Services: • DHCP client; 156 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation • • • • • • • • • DNS client; FTP/TFTP client; NAT; CDP; IP spoofing; AAA (Authentication, authorization and accounting): Local AAA (Access rights table); PAP, CHAP, MS-CHAP (Client/ Server); RADIUS, TACACS+ (Client, Remote server authentication) Management: • • • • • • • • • • Terminal configuration ports: RS-232 console and telnet; Terminal configuration interface; Cisco like command interpreter; Script support; Running and startup configurations saving and recovery; SNMP agent v.1, v.2, v.3, MIB II; Built-in diagnostic; Ping, traceroute; Local statistics (interfaces, IP, TCP, UDP, ICMP, Frame Relay, etc.); Debugging functions Getting Started 15.1 In this section we will attempt to configure a simple point-to-point connection at two different data rates (40Mbps and 10Mbps). This will be based on the default WAN protocol, HDLC using two AMT-75 modems with AHPG routers installed. There are effectively 2 areas of configuration we are concerned with: • • Modem IF/RF channel (Physical and Data-link layer) IP Gateway network In this example, it will be assumed that the first area of concern – modem Tx/Rx frequency, data rates, coding types, etc. are already set as desired. We will primarily concern ourselves with the configuration of the IP Gateway (AHPG), which is done via a separate port (Labelled CONSOLE on the rear of the Modem chassis). Briefly we will check the interface selection in immediate following section. 15.1.1 Modem M&C configuration This is done via the regular M&C port (Labelled RS-232 M&C) or via the front panel. Configure interface for “Ethernet”. This is achieved with the console command ‘ifmode ethernet’ or by selecting INTERFACE > MODE > ETHERNET on the front panel. Following this command, data traffic will be routed via the ETH0/ETH1 ports (dependent upon router configuration which follows). 157 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation 15.1.2 Router module configuration This is done via the CONSOLE port on the rear of the Modem. The router M&C operates independently of the Modem M&C and offers the user a comprehensive set of control commands compliant with Cisco syntax. These are detailed in the “Communications Processor” document, “Advantech IP Gateway Rev.1” accompanying this manual. Connection to the router M&C is made directly via the serial interface, labeled CONSOLE on the rear of the modem chassis. As stated at the beginning, the purpose of this exercise is to illustrate a simple point-to-point link with two AMT-75+AHPG modems. Figure 80 illustrates what we are trying to achieve. Computer 192.168.1.4 text Computer 172.16.3.20 text Application level NM255.255.255.0 GW 192.168.1.1 NM 255.255.0.0 GW 172.16.1.1 LAN LAN Netmask: 255.255.0.0 Netmask: 255.255.255.0 WAN 10.0.0.0 / 8 Ethernet 0 Serial 0 or Serial 0/1 Serial 0 or Serial 0/1 Ethernet 0 NM 255.255.255.0 10.0.0.1 / 8 10.0.0.2 / 8 NM 255.255.0.0 AHPG Gateway Modem Modem AHPG Gateway 192.168.1.1 route 172.16.0.0/16 10.0.0.2 AMT-75 #1 172.16.1.1 route 192.168.1.0/8 10.0.0.1 AMT-75 #2 Figure 80: Simple point-to-point configuration of two AMT-75 Modems 158 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation The computer (1) connected via the LAN to AMT-75 #1 has the following parameters: IP Address Subnet Mask Gateway 192.168.1.4 255.255.255.0 192.168.1.1 This enables computer 1 to communicate beyond the LAN via the AMT-75 #1 gateway. Likewise, computer 2 has the following parameters in order to communicate with the AMT-75 #2 gateway: IP Address Subnet Mask Gateway 172.16.3.20 255.255.0.0 172.16.1.1 Now, to configure the gateways: Gateway 1 (192.168.1.1): Connect to the CONSOLE port on Modem 1 and start a terminal application. You should see the prompt > Type enable and press [ENTER]. The prompt changes: # To clear the existing router configuration (if necessary), enter the following command: #clear startup-config If you are returned to the ‘>’ prompt, repeat the enable step above. Set the Gateway (LAN) address Enter the following lines: #configure terminal (config)#interface Ethernet 0 (config-if)#ip address 192.168.1.1/8 (config-if)#no shutdown (config-if)#exit Note the /8 in the IP address is the Subnetmask. /8 means 255.255.255.0 Note also that you may use the key to auto-complete any command entered. Set up the serial (WAN) port Enter the following lines: #configure terminal (config)#interface Serial 1/0 (config-if)#ip address 1.0.0.1/8 (config-if)#no shutdown (config-if)#exit 159 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation Set up the routing Enter the following: (config)#ip route 172.16.0.0/16 10.0.0.2 (config)#exit The /16 specifies a subnet of 255.255.0.0. This means “any IP packet with address 172.16… route to IP address 10.0.0.2”. In effect, route over our mini-WAN as shown in Figure 80. To show the running configuration, Enter the following: #sh ru A page of information showing the IP addresses and route we just set up will appear. Save the configuration to NVRAM. Enter the following: #copy running-config startup-config Gateway 2 (172.16.1.1): Same procedure as for Gateway 1, except with our desired settings for this particular LAN. Connect to the CONSOLE on Modem 2 and enter the following: >enable #configure terminal (config)#interface Ethernet 0 (config-if)#ip address 172.16.1.1/8 (config-if)#no shutdown (config-if)#exit (config)#interface Serial 1/0 (config-if)#ip address 10.0.0.2/8 (config-if)#exit (config)#ip route 192.168.1.0/8 10.0.0.1 (config)#exit #copy running-config startup-config Connection check Now we have fully configured the two computers, modems and gateways a connection check can be performed using the ping service on each computer. Try to ping the remote computer on each end. If successful, a reply message will be received. If not, a timed out message will be printed. For Windows PCs, start a DOS console and type ping where remote address is the address of the remote computer. 160 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation CHAPTER 16 APPENDIX E G.703 TELECOMMUNICATIONS GATEWAY The Telecommunications Gateway for Advantech AMT 3X, 6X and 7X series of modems is a powerful interface card adding to the standard EIA-530, multiple E1/T1 G703 interfaces, 10/100BaseT Ethernet (IP Gateway) and optionally 2 x FXS analog telephony line interfaces. The balanced G703 interface can be configured for either E1 or T1 lines and for either symmetric or asymmetric Drop and Insert capability. Up to eight G703 telecommunication E1/T1 traffic and IP data interfaces can be multiplexed into the same Satellite SCPC transmission. Legacy RS530 traffic is also supported. The Telecommunications Gateway data interface card provides a full duplex framing and de-framing transceiver for eight T1 or E1 ports. The Gateway also supports an Advantech Proprietary Overhead Channel (APOC) providing 64 KHz overhead data and an optional 64 KHz voice channel. Drop & Insert Mode is supported at both DS-0 and T1/E1 level (through DS-0 level) with either CCS or CAS signaling. Ethernet interface is supported stand-alone or combined (multiplexed) with G.703 in the same traffic using proprietary APOC. • • • • • • • • • 16.1 Two Quad T1/E1 SCTs (single chip transceiver) DS21458 interface; Ethernet 10/100 Base-T interface; Drop & Insert capability is supported for up to 256 DS-0 timeslots with proprietary framing structure (up to 240 or 248 timeslots, depending on the frame structure with the associated signaling; Optional single 64 KHz or dual 32 KHz APOC Overhead Voice Channel (Legerity LE78D11); Optional RS-422 transparent 64 Kbps channel which is mapped into APOC Overhead Data Channel; Ethernet (via Host CPU) à SCC (Serial Communication Controller) or UTOPIA interface; Frames the incoming data with Advantech Proprietary Overhead Channel (APOC), a TDMbased frame while dynamically allocating its contents; Selectable Internal 1Mbit or External 4 Mbit G.703 Doppler Buffer with granularity of 2 bytes (16 bits); Total up to 100 Mbps throughput. Rear Panel Connector Arrangements Note: Unlike other modems in this series the RS232 the front panel. Modem Console connector is located on P7 RS-485 Figure 81: Rear Panel 161 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation 16.1.1 RS-232 Console Connector (J3) To Monitor and Control the Telecommunications Gateway Interface connect the D Sub 9-pin connector (J3) to the COM port of a PC or similar device. D-Sub 9 connector Pin Number Pin 1 Pin 2 Pin 3 Pin 4 Pin 5 Pin 6 Pin 7 Pin 8 Pin 9 16.1.2 Description Not used Tx Data Rx Data Not Used Ground Not used Not used Not used Not used Overhead D-Sub 15 pin Connector (J14) To Monitor and Control the Telecommunications Gateway Interface connect the D Sub 9-pin connector (J3) to the COM port of a PC or similar device. D-sub 15 connector Pin Number Pin 1 Pin 2 Pin 3 Pin 4 Pin 5 Pin 6 Pin 7 Pin 8 Pin 9 Pin 10 Pin 11 Pin 12 Pin 13 Pin 14 Pin 15 Description Rx Clock + Rx Clock – Rx Data + Rx Data – Ground Tx Clock + Tx Clock – Tx Data + Tx Data – Not Used SCTE + SCTE – Not Used Not Used Ground 162 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation 16.1.3 RJ-45 Ethernet Console Connector Pin Out (J5) The 10/100BaseT Ethernet M&C connection utilizes a RJ-45 connector, as shown in the following figure, which also depicts the arrangement of the pins looking into the connector. RJ-45 Pin Number Pin 1 Pin 2 Pin 3 Pin 4 Pin 5 Pin 6 Pin 7 Pin 8 16.1.4 Description Tx + Tx – Rx + Common Common Rx – Common Common Wire Color Codes White & Orange Orange White & Green Blue White & Blue Green White & Brown Brown Crossover Cable Pins 3 6 1 --2 --- Balanced E1/T1 Connector Ports 1-4 (J16/1/2/3/4) This connector provides access to four E1/T1 ports 1 to 4. The connector is comprised of four RJ45 connectors wired as follows: Connector J16/1 RJ-45 Pin Number Pin 1 Pin 2 Pin 3 Pin 4 Pin 5 Pin 6 Pin 7 Pin 8 Description RRING-1 RTIP-1 Not Used TRING-1 TTIP-1 Not used Not used Not used 163 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation Connector J16/2 RJ-45 Pin Number Pin 1 Pin 2 Pin 3 Pin 4 Pin 5 Pin 6 Pin 7 Pin 8 Description RRING-2 RTIP-2 Not Used TRING-2 TTIP-2 Not used Not used Not used Connector J16/3 RJ-45 Pin Number Pin 1 Pin 2 Pin 3 Pin 4 Pin 5 Pin 6 Pin 7 Pin 8 Description RRING-3 RTIP-3 Not Used TRING-3 TTIP-3 Not used Not used Not used Connector J16/4 RJ-45 Pin Number Pin 1 Pin 2 Pin 3 Pin 4 Pin 5 Pin 6 Pin 7 Pin 8 Description RRING-4 RTIP-4 Not Used TRING-4 TTIP-4 Not used Not used Not used 164 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation 16.1.5 Balanced E1/T1 Connector Ports 5-8 (J17/1/2/3/4) This connector provides access to four E1/T1 ports 5 to 8. The connector is comprised of four RJ45 connectors wired as follows: Connector J17/1 RJ-45 Pin Number Pin 1 Pin 2 Pin 3 Pin 4 Pin 5 Pin 6 Pin 7 Pin 8 Description RRING-5 RTIP-5 Not Used TRING-5 TTIP-5 Not used Not used Not used Connector J17/2 RJ-45 Pin Number Pin 1 Pin 2 Pin 3 Pin 4 Pin 5 Pin 6 Pin 7 Pin 8 Description RRING-6 RTIP-6 Not Used TRING-6 TTIP-6 Not used Not used Not used Connector J17/3 RJ-45 Pin Number Pin 1 Pin 2 Pin 3 Pin 4 Pin 5 Pin 6 Pin 7 Pin 8 Description RRING-7 RTIP-7 Not Used TRING-7 TTIP-7 Not used Not used Not used 165 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation Connector J17/4 RJ-45 Pin Number Pin 1 Pin 2 Pin 3 Pin 4 Pin 5 Pin 6 Pin 7 Pin 8 16.1.6 Description RRING-8 RTIP-8 Not Used TRING-8 TTIP-8 Not used Not used Not used FXS Dual RJ-11 Telephone Interface (J13) Pin Number Pin 1 Pin 2 Pin 3 Pin 4 Pin 5 Pin 6 Pin 7 Pin 8 Pin 9 Pin 10 Pin 11 Pin 12 Description Not used Not used RING-1 TIP-1 Not used Not used Not used Not used RING-2 TIP-2 Not used Not used 166 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation Command Set 16.2 The command set for the Telecommunications Gateway is a sub-set of the Router Command Set. These are detailed in the “Communications Processor” document, “Advantech IP Gateway Rev.1” accompanying this manual. The command set is accessible only by a Personal Computer (PC) running a terminal emulation program such as HyperTerminal or other remote control device connected to the dedicated Gateway Console connector (J3) or Ethernet connector (J5) on the rear panel. The commands are not accessible by the modem front control panel if fitted. Set the terminal as follows: Baud Rate: 9600 Data Bits: 8 Parity: No Stop Bit: 1 Successful connection will be indicated on the terminal screen by the following prompt: router> Continue by typing: enable The response will be: router# 16.2.1 Help As a reminder the Help features supported by the modem are: router# help all The following will be displayed: HELP: MODEL: SERIAL: MDATE: Alphabetic list of commands. The modem model. The modem serial number. The modem manufacturing date. In line Help: Suffixing a '?' to the command displays a description of the command function. 167 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation Example: router# show running-config? The TAB key auto-completes any command. This is a useful shortcut as well as not having to remember all the keywords. If more than one command is possible, all alternatives are displayed. 16.2.2 16.2.3 Recall and Editing ↑ Recall the previous command ↓ Recall next command ← Shift left for command editing Backspace Delete the previous character Del Delete the current character !! Execute previous command Command Syntax The Router commands are contained in a series of menus. The current active menu is indicated by the prompt command. For instance the Router Root menu is indicated by the prompt: router# Sub-menus are shown in parenthesis, for example: router(config)# indicates that commands from the sub-menu config may be entered. Further sub-menus are indicated following in hyphens, e.g.: router(config-controller-e1)# To move from any sub-menu back towards the root menu, use the exit command or Ctrl-Z The following examples illustrate the execution of two common requirements: Configuring an Ethernet port and setting an IP address. To configure an Ethernet port, enter the following command sequence: router# configure terminal router(config)# router(config)# interface Ethernet 0 router(config-if)# router(config-if)#no shutdown 168 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation Assuming the Ethernet interface status was ‘down’ prior to the above commands two messages will be returned: router(config-if)#% Link layer on interface Ethernet0, changed state to up router(config-if)#% Link protocol on interface Ethernet0, changed state to up To set an IP address (192.168.4.52/16 in this example) enter the following command sequence: router# ip addresss 192.168.4.52/16 router(config-if)# And to return to the root menu: router(config-if)# exit router(config)# router(config)# exit router# (….or press CTRL-Z twice) 16.2.4 Commands for the Telecommunications Gateway All of the commands for the Telecommunications Gateway Interface are contained in the Router Submenu config. Enter this menu by typing the following router menu command from the root: router# configure terminal The response: router(config)# will indicate successful execution of this command. This sub-menu contains commands that allow access to sub-menus that configure the operation of the following functions: 1. E1 Channel Controller Sub-Menu - used to set-up the parameters of the individual E1 channels. 2. Multiplexer Controller Sub Menu - used to configure Transmit and Receive sides of the multiplexer. 169 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation Function Command following prompt: Description Action E1 interface port identification number (0 to 7). Default: No E1 controller selected for set-up. Selects the submenu: router(configcontroller-e1) router(config)# port: Configure the controller of an E1 port controller e1 port: Configure the controller of a MUX port 16.2.5 controller mux Mux interface port identification number (0 to 7). Default: No Mux controller selected for set-up. Selects the submenu: router(configcontroller-mux) Commands to set up individual E1 channels Sub-menu router (config-controller-e1) Function Configure the Clock Source of an E1 port Select Frame type Loopback an entire E1 (including all channel-groups) toward the line and router. Disable an E1 controller Command following prompt: Description router(configcontroller-e1)# clock source line line: Clock sourced from the E1 line. (Default) clock source internal internal: clock (free-running). no clock source no: Selects the default setting (E1 line clock) framing crc4 framing no-crc4 loopback local payload loopback local line no loopback local Default: CRC4 payload: The external line signal is looped back toward the network and the DS1 signal reframed. line: The external line signal is looped back toward the network but the DS1 signal is not reframed. no: Resumes normal operation. (Default) shutdown shutdown: Disables E1 controller (Default) no shutdown no: enables E1 controller. 170 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation 16.2.6 Mux Controller set-up commands Sub-menu router (config-controller-mux) Function Command following prompt: Description router(configcontroller-mux)# Selects the sub-menu: Configure transmit side parameters of Mux controller. transmit-side Configure receive side parameters of Mux controller. receive-side router(config-controller-muxreceive-side) loopback local framer framer: The data is clocked into Tx FIFO, APOC framed and looped directly to Rx framer. Loop back an entire Mux controller (including all channels defined on the controller) towards the line and router. Selects the sub-menu: loopback local line loopback local modem loopback local terrestrial loopback local utopia no loopback local Configure transmit side parameters of Mux controller. router(config-controller-muxtransmit-side) line: Loops the incoming line side data back on the line side. modem: Loops the demodulator data on the C-bus to the modulator without any processing. terrestrial: Loops the de-framed data towards the Tx framer on the terrestrial interface side. no: Enables normal operation. (Default) Selects the sub-menu: transmit-side router(config-controller-muxtransmit-side) 171 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation 16.2.7 Mux Controller set-up commands – Transmit side Sub-menu router (config-controller-mux-transmit-side) Note: Unless stated otherwise the Default state of each of the following commands is not configured. Command following prompt: Function Configure transmit data rate. Specify E1 channels to be dropped. data-rate speed drop e1 port: E1 interface port number (0 to 7) channel: E1 channel number (0 to 31) mux-channel: Mux channel number (0 to 255) drop-range e1 Configure the number of bytes for each APOC DS-0 timeslot. Disable the transmit side of Mux controller. speed: numerical value from 0 to 200000000 (0 to 200Mb/s) Specify E1 channel groups to be dropped. Description router(configcontroller-muxtransmit-side)# port: E1 interface port number (0 to 7) first-channel: Lowest E1 channel number of drop group (0 to 31) last-channel: Highest E1 channel number of drop group (0 to 31) first-mux-channel: Lowest Mux channel number of group (0 to 255) last-mux-channel: Highest Mux channel number of group (0 to 255) Value: the number of bytes. payload value Select from 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64, 128, or 256 (Default is 32) shutdown no shutdown (Default: shutdown) 172 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation 16.2.8 Mux Controller set-up commands – Receive side Sub-menu router (config-controller-mux-receive-side) Note: Unless stated otherwise the Default state of each of the following commands is not configured. Command following prompt: Function Configure receive data rate. Specify E1 channels to be inserted. data-rate speed insert e1 port: E1 interface port number (0 to 7) channel: E1 channel number (0 to 31) mux-channel: Mux channel number (0 to 255) insert-range e1 Configure the number of bytes for each APOC DS-0 timeslot. Disable the receive side of Mux controller. speed: numerical value from 0 to 200000000 (0 to 200Mb/s) Specify E1 channel groups to be inserted. Description router(configcontroller-muxreceive-side)# port: E1 interface port number (0 to 7) first-channel: Lowest E1 channel number of insert group (0 to 31) last-channel: Highest E1 channel number of insert group (0 to 31) first-mux-channel: Lowest Mux channel number of group (0 to 255) last-mux-channel: Highest Mux channel number of group (0 to 255) Value: the number of bytes. payload value Select from 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64, 128, or 256 (Default is 32) shutdown no shutdown (Default: shutdown) 173 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation 16.3 Configuration examples of AMT-70 modem equipped with PDH multiplexer AMT-70 modems may be configured to use internal or external timing. The source of the external timing can be either E1/T1 interface #4 or E1/T1 interface #8. It should be noted that the interface numbering in the configuration script starts from controller number 0 which corresponds to E1/T1 port #1 and ends with controller number 7, which is E1/T1 port #8. Seven example configurations are listed to help with configuration. There are a couple of important additional configuration notes. 16.3.1.1 To change a current Insert or Drop range First the user must remove the current active setting before entering the new values. For example if the current drop range is drop-range e1 3 0 31 0 31 then the user must first type no drop-range e1 3 0 31 0 31 before entering the new drop range. 16.3.1.2 To store the current configuration To modify the start-up configuration it is necessary to copy the current running-configuration to the startup-configuration. This can be achieved by using the command Copy running-configuration startup-configuration 16.3.2 Example 1 One full E1 connected to the E1/T1 interface port #4 and external timing. All 32 time slots are dropped on Transmit over the satellite link and inserted in the same order on the Receive side. router#configure terminal router(config)#controller e1 3 router(config-controller-e1)#clock source line router(config-controller-e1)#exit router(config)#controller mux 0 router(config-controller-mux)#doppler-buffer external 128 router(config-controller-mux)#clock source framer1 router(config-controller-mux)#transmit-side router(config-controller-mux-tx)#data rate 2112000 router(config-controller-mux-tx)#drop-range e1 3 0 31 0 31 router(config-controller-mux-tx)#no shutdown router(config-controller-mux-tx)#exit router(config-controller-mux)#receive-side router(config-controller-mux-rx)#data-rate 2112000 router(config-controller-mux-rx)#insert-range e1 3 0 31 0 31 router(config-controller-mux-rx)#no shutdown router(config-controller-mux)#exit router(config)#exit router# 174 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation router#show running-config Building configuration... Current configuration : 1027 bytes ----------------------------! integrity,hash(md5,wz6GgXLFGjeWLg/shPZXuw==); ! Generated by router on 30.6.2136 5:7:12 no dns use-cache dns order hosts-then-bind ip domain-lookup ip domain-name local hostname router ip host localhost 127.0.0.1 no service timestamps debug no service timestamps log controller E1 0 framing no-crc4 clock source internal no shutdown controller E1 1 framing no-crc4 clock source internal no shutdown controller E1 2 framing no-crc4 clock source internal no shutdown controller E1 3 framing no-crc4 no shutdown controller E1 4 framing no-crc4 clock source internal no shutdown controller E1 5 framing no-crc4 clock source internal no shutdown controller E1 6 framing no-crc4 clock source internal no shutdown controller E1 7 framing no-crc4 clock source internal no shutdown controller Mux 0 doppler-buffer internal 10 clock source framer1 175 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation transmit-side data-rate 2112000 drop-range E1 3 0 31 0 31 no shutdown receive-side data-rate 2112000 insert-range E1 3 0 31 0 31 no shutdown loopback local framer interface Ethernet0 ip address 192.168.4.145 255.255.0.0 mac-address 00:09:0F:22:00:07 speed auto duplex auto no shutdown interface Serial1/0 no ip forward-to-the-same-net ip address 10.0.0.1 255.255.0.0 no keepalive no shutdown 16.3.3 Example 2 One full E1 connected to the E1/T1 interface port #8 and external timing. All 32 time slots dropped on Transmit over the satellite side and inserted in the same order on the Receive side. router#configure terminal router(config)#controller e1 7 router(config-controller-e1)#clock source line router(config-controller-e1)#exit router(config)#controller mux 0 router(config-controller-mux)#clock source framer2 router(config-controller-mux)#doppler-buffer external 128 router(config-controller-mux)#transmit-side router(config-controller-mux-tx)#data-rate 2112000 router(config-controller-mux-tx)#drop-range e1 7 0 31 0 31 router(config-controller-mux-tx)#no shutdown router(config-controller-mux-tx)#exit router(config-controller-mux)#receive-side router(config-controller-mux-rx)#data-rate 2112000 router(config-controller-mux-rx)#insert-range e1 7 0 31 0 31 router(config-controller-mux-rx)#no shutdown router(config-controller-mux)#exit router(config)#exit router# router#show running-config Building configuration Current configuration : 1027 bytes ----------------------------! integrity,hash(md5,wz6GgXLFGjeWLg/shPZXuw==); 176 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation ! Generated by router on 30.6.2136 5:7:12 no dns use-cache dns order hosts-then-bind ip domain-lookup ip domain-name local hostname router ip host localhost 127.0.0.1 no service timestamps debug no service timestamps log controller E1 0 framing no-crc4 clock source internal no shutdown controller E1 1 framing no-crc4 clock source internal no shutdown controller E1 2 framing no-crc4 clock source internal no shutdown controller E1 3 framing no-crc4 no shutdown controller E1 4 framing no-crc4 clock source internal no shutdown controller E1 5 framing no-crc4 clock source internal no shutdown controller E1 6 framing no-crc4 clock source internal no shutdown controller E1 7 framing no-crc4 no shutdown controller Mux 0 doppler-buffer internal 10 clock source framer2 transmit-side data-rate 2112000 drop-range E1 7 0 31 0 31 no shutdown 177 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation receive-side data-rate 2112000 insert-range E1 7 0 31 0 31 no shutdown loopback local framer interface Ethernet0 ip address 192.168.4.145 255.255.0.0 mac-address 00:09:0F:22:00:07 speed auto duplex auto no shutdown interface Serial1/0 no ip forward-to-the-same-net ip address 10.0.0.1 255.255.0.0 no keepalive no shutdown 16.3.4 Example 3 Four full E1s connected to E1/T1 interface ports #1, #2, #3 and #4 and external timing derived from port #4. All 32 time slots of each E1 interface are dropped on transmit over the satellite link and inserted in the same order on the receive side. router#configure terminal router(config)#controller e1 0 router(config-controller-e1)#clock source internal router(config-controller-e1)# no shutdown router(config-controller-e1)#exit router(config)#controller e1 1 router(config-controller-e1)#clock source internal router(config-controller-e1)# no shutdown router(config-controller-e1)#exit router(config)#controller e1 2 router(config-controller-e1)#clock source internal router(config-controller-e1)# no shutdown router(config-controller-e1)#exit router(config)#controller e1 3 router(config-controller-e1)#clock source line router(config-controller-e1)# no shutdown router(config-controller-e1)#exit router(config)#controller mux 0 router(config-controller-mux)#doppler-buffer internal router(config-controller-mux)#clock source framer1 router(config-controller-mux)#transmit-side router(config-controller-mux-tx)#data-rate 8256000 router(config-controller-mux-tx)#drop-range e1 0 0 31 router(config-controller-mux-tx)#drop-range e1 1 0 31 router(config-controller-mux-tx)#drop-range e1 2 0 31 router(config-controller-mux-tx)#drop-range e1 3 0 31 router(config-controller-mux-tx)#no shutdown router(config-controller-mux-tx)#exit 20 0 31 32 63 64 95 96 127 178 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation router(config-controller-mux)#receive-side router(config-controller-mux-rx)#data-rate 8256000 router(config-controller-mux-rx)#insert-range e1 0 router(config-controller-mux-rx)#insert-range e1 1 router(config-controller-mux-rx)#insert-range e1 2 router(config-controller-mux-rx)#insert-range e1 3 router(config-controller-mux-rx)#no shutdown router(config-controller-mux)#exit router(config)#exit router# 16.3.5 0 0 0 0 31 31 31 31 0 31 32 63 64 95 96 127 Example 4 Four full E1s connected to E1/T1 interface ports #5, #6, #7 and #8 and external timing derived from port #8. All 32 time slots of each E1 interface are dropped on Transmit over the satellite link and inserted in the same order on the Receive side. router#configure terminal router(config)#controller e1 4 router(config-controller-e1)#clock source internal router(config-controller-e1)# no shutdown router(config-controller-e1)#exit router(config)#controller e1 5 router(config-controller-e1)#clock source internal router(config-controller-e1)# no shutdown router(config-controller-e1)#exit router(config)#controller e1 6 router(config-controller-e1)#clock source internal router(config-controller-e1)# no shutdown router(config-controller-e1)#exit router(config)#controller e1 7 router(config-controller-e1)#clock source line router(config-controller-e1)# no shutdown router(config-controller-e1)#exit router(config)#controller mux 0 router(config-controller-mux)#clock source framer2 router(config-controller-mux)#doppler-buffer internal router(config-controller-mux)#transmit-side router(config-controller-mux-tx)#data-rate 8256000 router(config-controller-mux-tx)#drop-range e1 4 0 31 router(config-controller-mux-tx)#drop-range e1 5 0 31 router(config-controller-mux-tx)#drop-range e1 6 0 31 router(config-controller-mux-tx)#drop-range e1 7 0 31 router(config-controller-mux-tx)#no shutdown router(config-controller-mux-tx)#exit router(config-controller-mux)#receive-side router(config-controller-mux-rx)#data-rate 8256000 router(config-controller-mux-rx)#insert-range e1 4 0 router(config-controller-mux-rx)#insert-range e1 5 0 router(config-controller-mux-rx)#insert-range e1 6 0 router(config-controller-mux-rx)#insert-range e1 7 0 router(config-controller-mux-rx)#no shutdown router(config-controller-mux)#exit router(config)#exit router# 20 0 31 32 63 64 95 96 127 31 31 31 31 0 31 32 63 64 95 96 127 179 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation 16.3.6 Example 5 Two full E1s connected to the E1/T1 interface ports #3 and #4 and external timing derived from port #4. All 32 time slots of each E1 interface are dropped on Transmit over the satellite link and inserted in the same order on the Receive side. router#configure terminal router(config)#controller e1 2 router(config-controller-e1)#clock source internal router(config-controller-e1)# no shutdown router(config-controller-e1)#exit router(config)#controller e1 3 router(config-controller-e1)#clock source line router(config-controller-e1)# no shutdown router(config-controller-e1)#exit router(config)#controller mux 0 router(config-controller-mux)#doppler-buffer external router(config-controller-mux)#clock source framer1 router(config-controller-mux)#transmit-side router(config-controller-mux-tx)#data-rate 4160000 router(config-controller-mux-tx)#drop-range e1 2 0 31 router(config-controller-mux-tx)#drop-range e1 3 0 31 router(config-controller-mux-tx)#no shutdown router(config-controller-mux-tx)#exit router(config-controller-mux)#receive-side router(config-controller-mux-rx)#data-rate 4160000 router(config-controller-mux-rx)#insert-range e1 2 0 router(config-controller-mux-rx)#insert-range e1 3 0 router(config-controller-mux-rx)#no shutdown router(config-controller-mux)#exit router(config)#exit router# 16.3.7 128 0 31 32 63 31 0 31 31 32 63 Example 6 Two full E1s connected to the E1/T1 interface ports #7 and #8 and external timing derived from the port #8. All 32 time slots of each E1 interface are dropped on Transmit over the satellite link and inserted in the same order on the Receive side. router#configure terminal router(config)#controller e1 6 router(config-controller-e1)#clock source internal router(config-controller-e1)# no shutdown router(config-controller-e1)#exit router(config)#controller e1 7 router(config-controller-e1)#clock source line router(config-controller-e1)# no shutdown router(config-controller-e1)#exit router(config)#controller mux 0 router(config-controller-mux)#doppler-buffer external 128 180 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation router(config-controller-mux)#clock source framer2 router(config-controller-mux)#transmit-side router(config-controller-mux-tx)#data-rate 4160000 router(config-controller-mux-tx)#drop-range e1 6 0 31 router(config-controller-mux-tx)#drop-range e1 7 0 31 router(config-controller-mux-tx)#no shutdown router(config-controller-mux-tx)#exit router(config-controller-mux)#receive-side router(config-controller-mux-rx)#data-rate 4160000 router(config-controller-mux-rx)#insert-range e1 6 0 router(config-controller-mux-rx)#insert-range e1 7 0 router(config-controller-mux-rx)#no shutdown router(config-controller-mux)#exit router(config)#exit router# 16.3.8 0 31 32 63 31 0 31 31 32 63 Example 7 Two full E1s connected to the E1/T1 interface ports #1 and #2 using internal timing. All 32 time slots of each E1 interface are dropped on Transmit over the satellite link and inserted in the same order on the Receive side. router#configure terminal router(config)#controller e1 0 router(config-controller-e1)#clock source internal router(config-controller-e1)# no shutdown router(config-controller-e1)#exit router(config)#controller e1 1 router(config-controller-e1)#clock source internal router(config-controller-e1)# no shutdown router(config-controller-e1)#exit router(config)#controller mux 0 router(config-controller-mux)#doppler-buffer external router(config-controller-mux)#clock source internal router(config-controller-mux)#transmit-side router(config-controller-mux-tx)#data-rate 4160000 router(config-controller-mux-tx)#drop-range e1 0 0 31 router(config-controller-mux-tx)#drop-range e1 1 0 31 router(config-controller-mux-tx)#no shutdown router(config-controller-mux-tx)#exit router(config-controller-mux)#receive-side router(config-controller-mux-rx)#data-rate 4160000 router(config-controller-mux-rx)#insert-range e1 0 0 router(config-controller-mux-rx)#insert-range e1 1 0 router(config-controller-mux-rx)#no shutdown router(config-controller-mux)#exit router(config)#exit router# 128 0 31 32 63 31 0 31 31 32 63 All seven examples above allocate zero bandwidth for the Ethernet interface. To enable the bandwidth over the Ethernet port, the data rate for Transmit and Receive side should be increased. Any excess of the data rate over the required for TDM part will be assigned or added to the Ethernet bandwidth. 181 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation CHAPTER 17 APPENDIX F TURBO PRODUCT CODE PERFORMANCE Typical Turbo code results for a variety of data rates are listed below: All Graphs are SNR .v. BER Figure 82: QPSK at 96kbps at –100dBm / Hz 182 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation Figure 83: QPSK at 256kbps at –104dBm/Hz Input Power 183 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation Figure 84: QPSK 3MBps at –104dBm/Hz Input Power 184 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation Figure 85: QPSK at 10Mbps at –104dBm/Hz Input Power 185 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation Figure 86: QPSK at 35Mbps at –104dBm/Hz Input Power 186 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation Figure 87: 8PSK at 150kbps at –104dBm/Hz Input Power 187 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation Figure 88: 8PSK at 400kbps at –104dBm/Hz Input Power 188 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation Figure 89: 8PSK at 16Mbps at –104dBm/Hz Input Power 189 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation Figure 90: 8PSK at 55Mbps at –104dBm/Hz Input Power 190 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation Figure 91: 16QAM at 512kbps at –104dBm/Hz Input Power 191 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation Figure 92: 16QAM at 6Mbps at –104dBm/Hz Input Power 192 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation Figure 93: 16QAM at 20Mbps at –104dBm/Hz Input Power 193 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation Figure 94: 16QAM at 70Mbps at –104dBm/Hz Input Power 194 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation CHAPTER 18 APPENDIX G DVB-S2 THEORETICAL PERFORMANCE The DVB-S2 S/N specification for DVB-S2 NORMAL Block size is listed in Figure 95 . This data is taken directly from the DVB-S2 specification. Mode Spectral efficiency QPSK ¼ QPSK 1/3 QPSK 2/5 QPSK ½ QPSK 3/5 QPSK 2/3 QPSK ¾ QPSK 4/5 QPSK 5/6 QPSK 8/9 QPSK 9/10 8PSK 3/5 8PSK 2/3 8PSK ¾ 8PSK 5/6 8PSK 8/9 8PSK 9/10 16APSK 2/3 16APSK ¾ 16APSK 4/5 16APSK 5/6 16APSK 8/9 16APSK 9/10 32APSK 3/4 32APSK 4/5 32APSK 5/6 32APSK 8/9 32APSK 9/10 Ideal Es/No (dB) 0.490243 0.656448 0.791874 0.988857 1.188303 1.322251 1.487472 1.587195 1.654662 1.766451 1.788612 1.779989 1.980633 2.228122 2.478560 2.646012 2.679207 2.637197 2.966726 3.165621 3.300181 3.523142 3.567341 3,703295 3,951571 4,119540 4,397854 4,453027 -2.35 -1.24 -0.30 1.00 2.23 3.10 4.03 4.68 5.18 6.20 6.42 5.50 6.62 7.91 9.35 10.69 10.98 8.97 10.21 11.03 11.61 12.89 13.13 12,73 13,64 14,28 15,69 16,05 Figure 95: DVB-S2 Theoretical Performance figures for FECFRAME length=64 800. Note that for FEC Frame SHORT 16Kbit blocks the ideal Es/No are 0.25dB worse. 195